ATN 910&910I&910B&950B V200R003C10 Hardware Description 01 (CLI)

ATN 910&910I&910B&950B Multi-Service Access
Equipment
V200R003C10
Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2014-01-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Equipment
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name Version
ATN 910 V200R003C10

ATN 910I
ATN 910B
ATN 950B
Intended Audience
This document describes the equipment structure, chassis structure, and board classification.
This document also describes each board of these classes in details.
This document helps you get the detailed information about the equipment hardware.
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers

l Hardware installation engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Equipment
Symbol Description

avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and

tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.
Command Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Equipment
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 01 (2014-01-31)

This document is the first release of the V200R003C10 version.
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Equipment
Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 ATN 910 Chassis............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Appearance.....................................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Slot Distribution.............................................................................................................................................................2
1.3 Installation Information..................................................................................................................................................3
1.4 Heat Dissipation.............................................................................................................................................................7
1.5 Safety Labels..................................................................................................................................................................8
2 ATN 910I Chassis........................................................................................................................10

2.1 Appearance...................................................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................................................13
2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................14
2.4 Panel.............................................................................................................................................................................16
2.5 Installation Information................................................................................................................................................23
2.6 Heat Dissipation...........................................................................................................................................................24
2.7 Safety Labels................................................................................................................................................................24
3 ATN 910B Chassis.......................................................................................................................27

3.1 Appearance...................................................................................................................................................................28
3.2 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................................................28
3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.............................................................................................................................30
3.4 Panel.............................................................................................................................................................................31
3.7 Safety Labels................................................................................................................................................................39
4 ATN 950B Chassis.......................................................................................................................41

4.1 Appearance...................................................................................................................................................................42
4.2 Slot Distribution...........................................................................................................................................................42
4.5 Safety Labels................................................................................................................................................................49
5 ATN 910 Boards...........................................................................................................................51
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Equipment
5.1 Board Overview............................................................................................................................................................53

5.2 Board Type and Application.........................................................................................................................................55
5.2.1 Board Type................................................................................................................................................................55
5.2.2 Ethernet Service Interface Board...............................................................................................................................58
5.2.3 E1 Service Interface Board........................................................................................................................................58
5.2.4 xDSL Service Interface Board...................................................................................................................................61
5.3 ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit..................................62
5.3.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................62
5.3.2 Functions and Features..............................................................................................................................................67
5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow..........................................................................................................................69
5.3.4 CF Card and DIP Switch...........................................................................................................................................71
5.3.5 Technical Specifications ...........................................................................................................................................72
5.4 AND1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic Interface Board.....................................................................75
5.4.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................75
5.4.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................79
5.5 AND1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface Board................................................................................80
5.5.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................80
5.6 AND1EG2 - 2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board..................................................................................................84
5.6.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................84
5.7 AND1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical Interface Board..........................................................................88
5.7.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................88
5.8 AND1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface Board.................................................................................94
5.8.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................94
5.9 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board......................................................................98
5.9.1 Front Panel.................................................................................................................................................................98
5.9.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................100
5.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................................102
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Equipment
5.9.4 Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................104
5.10 AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board................................................................................104
5.10.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................105
5.10.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................107
5.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................................108
5.10.4 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................110
5.11 AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface Board...............................................................................111
5.11.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................111
5.12 AND1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board .......................................................................................................118
5.12.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................118
5.13 AND1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface Board..............................................................................123
5.13.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................123
5.13.4 Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................................................127
5.14 AND1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface Board.................................................................................127
5.14.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................127
5.15 AND1SHD4 - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface Board ...............................................................................131
5.15.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................131
5.16 AND1SHD4I - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Interface Board for IMA Mode ..................................................................135
5.16.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................135
5.17 TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board..........................................................................................................................139
5.17.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................139
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Equipment
5.18 ANC1FAN - Fan Board............................................................................................................................................142

5.18.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................142
5.19 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................................................145
5.19.1 Appearance and Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................145
6 ATN 910I Boards........................................................................................................................147

7 ATN 910B Boards.......................................................................................................................148
8 ATN 950B Boards.......................................................................................................................149
8.1 Board Overview..........................................................................................................................................................151
8.2 Board Type and Application.......................................................................................................................................153
8.2.1 Board Type..............................................................................................................................................................153
8.2.2 Ethernet Service Interface Board.............................................................................................................................155
8.2.3 E1 Service Interface Board......................................................................................................................................156
8.2.4 STM-1 Service Interface Board...............................................................................................................................158
8.3 AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit..............................159
8.3.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................160
8.3.4 CF Card and DIP Switch.........................................................................................................................................166
8.3.5 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................................167
8.4 AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit..............................168
8.4.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................168
8.4.4 DIP Switch...............................................................................................................................................................174
8.5 AND1EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board ...................................................................................176
8.5.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................176
8.6 AND1EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board .....................................................................................180
8.6.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................180
8.7 AND1EM4F - 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board ......................................................................................185
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Equipment
8.7.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................185

8.8 AND1EM4C: 4 Channels GE/FE Combo Board.......................................................................................................190
8.8.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................191
8.8.4 Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance..............................................................................................195
8.9 AND1EM8F - 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board ......................................................................................197
8.9.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................197
8.10 AND1EX1 - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board...........................................................................................203
8.10.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................203
8.11 AND2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS Optical Interface Board..........................................207
8.11.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................208
8.12 AND2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical Interface Board.......................................................................213
8.12.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................213
8.12.4 Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance............................................................................................216
8.13 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board..................................................................217
8.13.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................217
8.13.4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................................223
8.14 AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board................................................................................224
8.14.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................224
8.15 AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface Board...............................................................................231
8.15.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................231
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Equipment

8.16 TND1PIU - Power Interface Board..........................................................................................................................237
8.16.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................238
8.16.4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................................240
8.17 AND1FAN - Fan Board...........................................................................................................................................241
8.17.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................241
8.17.4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................................................244
8.18 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................................................244
8.18.1 Appearance and Valid Slots..................................................................................................................................244
9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules.................................................................................246

9.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................247
9.2 FE Optical Module.....................................................................................................................................................249
9.3 GE Optical Module.....................................................................................................................................................251
9.4 10GE Optical Module.................................................................................................................................................256
9.5 Electrical Module.......................................................................................................................................................258
10 Cables.........................................................................................................................................260
10.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables................................................................................................................261
10.1.1 -48 V Power Supply Cables...................................................................................................................................261
10.1.2 AC Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................262
10.1.3 PGND Cables........................................................................................................................................................263
10.2 Management Cables.................................................................................................................................................264
10.3 Alarm Input/Output Cables......................................................................................................................................265
10.4 Clock Cables.............................................................................................................................................................266
10.4.1 External Clock Cables...........................................................................................................................................266
10.4.2 Clock Bridging Cables...........................................................................................................................................268
10.5 Service Cables..........................................................................................................................................................270
10.5.1 Ethernet Cables......................................................................................................................................................270
10.5.2 75-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables...........................................................................................................................................274
10.5.3 120-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................275
10.5.4 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................278
10.5.5 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables.......................................................................................................................................281
10.5.6 xDSL Cables..........................................................................................................................................................284
10.6 Optical Fibers...........................................................................................................................................................286
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

Equipment
11 Equipment Support.................................................................................................................288
11.1 Cabinet Support........................................................................................................................................................289
11.1.1 APM30H Outdoor Cabinet....................................................................................................................................289
11.1.2 IMB Network Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................290
11.1.3 19-inch Open Rack................................................................................................................................................292
11.1.4 N63E Cabinet........................................................................................................................................................293
11.2 Power Distribution Equipment.................................................................................................................................294
11.2.1 Power Distribution.................................................................................................................................................294
11.2.2 EPS30-4815AF Power System..............................................................................................................................295
11.2.3 27S48D Power System..........................................................................................................................................300
11.2.4 HW-100-48AC14D-1 Power System....................................................................................................................302
11.2.5 Lead-Acid Battery.................................................................................................................................................303
11.3 Heater........................................................................................................................................................................304
12 Quick Reference.......................................................................................................................306
12.1 Indicators..................................................................................................................................................................307
12.2 Dimensions and Weight............................................................................................................................................315
12.3 Power Consumption.................................................................................................................................................318
12.4 Interface Specifications............................................................................................................................................321
12.4.1 Specifications of STM-1 Optical Interfaces..........................................................................................................321
12.4.2 Specifications of FE Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................323
12.4.3 Specifications of GE Optical Interfaces................................................................................................................325
12.4.4 Specifications of 10GE Optical Interfaces............................................................................................................330
12.4.5 Specifications of GE and FE Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................332
12.4.6 Specifications of E1 Electrical Interfaces..............................................................................................................332
12.4.7 Specifications of T1 Electrical Interfaces..............................................................................................................333
12.4.8 Specifications of the ADSL2+ Interface...............................................................................................................333
12.4.9 Specifications of the VDSL2 Interface..................................................................................................................334
12.4.10 Specifications of the G.SHDSL Interface............................................................................................................334
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................335
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Equipment
Hardware Description 1 ATN 910 Chassis
1 ATN 910 Chassis
About This Chapter
The ATN 910 uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and supports multiple installation
modes, which facilitates flexible deployment.
The ATN 910 can be flexibly deployed with high reliability and scalability. It has the following
features:
l One power board provides two –48 V or –60 V DC power inputs, ensuring redundancy
backup of input power.
l The fan board provides three fans, ensuring proper heat dissipation even when a fan is
faulty.
l Two slots can be flexibly configured with service boards.
1.1 Appearance
The ATN 910 provides 6 slots and all boards are swappable. The ATN 910 provides six slots
and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in
different cabinets and racks.
1.2 Slot Distribution

This section describes slot distribution on the ATN 910.
1.3 Installation Information

ATN 910 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various
mounting ears, so ATN 910 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets.
1.4 Heat Dissipation

ATN 910 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
1.5 Safety Labels

The equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locations
of these safety labels.
Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Equipment
1.1 Appearance
The ATN 910 provides 6 slots and all boards are swappable. The ATN 910 provides six slots
and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at each side and can be installed in
different cabinets and racks.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the ATN 910 that has boards fully configured.
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the ATN 910 that has boards fully configured
Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of the ATN 910 that does not have boards fully configured.
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the ATN 910 that does not have boards fully configured

This section describes slot distribution on the ATN 910.
Figure 1-3 shows the slot distribution on the ATN 910.
Figure 1-3 Slot distribution on the ATN 910
SLOT 3 (2 x GE) SLOT 4 (2 x GE)

SLOT SLOT
5 6 SLOT 1 and SLOT 2
Table 1-1 describes priorities of slots where boards supported by the ATN 910 can be inserted.

Equipment
Table 1-1 Priorities of available slots
Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending

Order)
ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL slot 1 and slot 2 -
AND1EF8T/AND1EF8F slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 - slot 4

AND1EG2
AND1EG4F
AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B slot 3 or slot 4 slot 4 - slot 3

AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B
AND1MO1C slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 - slot 4
AND1AVD8A/ slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 - slot 4

AND1AVD8B
AND1SHD4/AND1SHD4I
TNC1PIU slot 5 -
ANC1FAN slot 6 -
Note: The ANC2CXPI or ANC2CXPL each house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one
ANC2CXPI or ANC2CXPL.

ATN 910 provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various
mounting ears, so ATN 910 can be installed in multiple types of cabinets.
As shown in Table 1-2, ATN 910 supports various mounting ears and can be installed in multiple
types of cabinets.
Table 1-2 Requirements on the cabinet and mounting ears
Mounting Ear Applicable Applicable Remarks

Cabinet Huawei Cabinet
Standard
IEC60297 N66E The mounting ears

N68E are delivered with
the device.
N610E
19-inch open rack
IMB network
cabinet
APM30H outdoor
cabinet

Equipment

Standard
ETSI300-119 N63E The mounting ears

N66T are rack-mounting
ears that are
installed on the
mounting ears
delivered with the
device.
IEC60297 (23- - The mounting ears

inch) are for a 23-inch
cabinet and are used
to substitute for the
mounting ears
delivered with the
device when the
device needs to be
installed in a 23-
inch cabinet.
ATN 910 provides three installation positions for mounting ears. Users can determine an
installation position for mounting ears based on the depth of the cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the
installation positions of mounting ears. Position 1 shows a pair of mounting ears delivered with
ATN 910.
Figure 1-4 Installation positions of mounting ears
Already installed
mounting ears
Position 3 for installing Position 1 for installing

the mounting ears the mounting ears
Position 2 for installing

the mounting ears
Determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the cabinet depth. The following
figures show the installation dimensions when mounting ears are installed in different positions.

Equipment
Figure 1-5 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (IEC)
Unit: mm
220
31.8
465.1
224
208
132.5

Equipment
Figure 1-6 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (ETSI)
Unit: mm
220
25
515
241.5
225.5
150

Equipment
Figure 1-7 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (23-inch)
Unit: mm
220
31.8
566.7
217.5
201.5
126
NOTE
When installing the ATN 910 in the cabinet, reserve 80 mm space at the front of the panel for cabling.

ATN 910 dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
Figure 1-8 shows the system air duct.

Equipment
Figure 1-8 ATN 910 Air duct
l Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on ATN 910 must be kept clean and
unblocked.
l A distance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on ATN 910
to ensure good ventilation.
l Filler panels must be installed on unused slots. In addition, on ATN 910, heat must be
dissipated by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
l The ambient temperature of ATN 910 must be within the range of -20°C to +60°C. When
ATN 910 is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the
temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of ATN 910.
1.5 Safety Labels

Label Position
Figure 1-9 shows positions of labels on the chassis.
Figure 1-9 Label position

ATN 910
电源额定值 POWER RATING: -48－-60V;4A
1类激光产品
Class 1 Laser Product
N14036
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で
使用すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用
者が適切な対策を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI-A
HUAWEI
中国制作
华为技术有限公司中国制造
华为技术有限公司
HUAW EI TEC HNOLOGIES CO.,L TD. M ADE IN C HIN A
HUAWE I TE CHNO LG I E S CO. , LTD. MADE IN CHINA
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table 1-3.

Equipment
Table 1-3 Label description
Figure Type Description
Backplane bar code label The bar code of the backplane will be
retrieved by ATN 910 as the equipment
serial number (ESN).
ESD protection label The label suggests the electrostatic-

sensitive equipment.
Chassis grounding label The label indicates the position of the

grounding terminal. When the equipment
is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, it is
recommended that you use the grounding
terminal specified in this label.

general grounding terminal. When the
equipment is installed in a cabinet rather
than a 19-inch cabinet, it is recommended
that you use the grounding terminal
specified in this label.
Fan warning label The label suggests that do not touch the fan
leaves when the fan is rotating.
Operation warning label The label indicates the precautions that

should be taken for operations on the PIU
! board. For details, see Label.
Qualification label The equipment is qualified.
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
ATN 910
Product nameplate label The label suggests the product name and
(General) certification.
1类激光产品
N14036 Class 1 Laser Product
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用すゐ
と電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適切な対策
を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI-A
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
ATN 910
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:(1)this device may not cause
harmful interference,and(2)this device must accept any interference
(North America) certification.
received,including interference that may cause undesired operation.
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で使用 1类激光产品
すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用者が適 Class 1 Laser Product
切な対策を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 V C C I ------ A
Complles With 21 CFR Chapter I,Subchapter J
N14036 C
UL US I.T.E.
65JJ
LISTED E210619
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

Equipment
Hardware Description 2 ATN 910I Chassis
2 ATN 910I Chassis
About This Chapter
The ATN 910I uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and supports multiple installation
2.1 Appearance
The ATN 910I integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a
mounting ear at each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks.
2.2 Functions and Features

The ATN 910I can receive and process FE, GE, and E1 service signals, implement service
scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface
functions.
2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ATN 910I consists of the ANF1CXPx, power module, and fan module.
2.4 Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the ATN 910I panel.

ATN 910I provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various
mounting ears, so ATN 910I can be installed in multiple types of cabinets.

ATN 910I dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
2.7 Safety Labels


Equipment
2.1 Appearance
The ATN 910I integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a
Table 2-1 describes multiple models of the ATN 910I.
Table 2-1 Description of the ATN 910I models
Model/ Built- Power Interface Temperature 1588 POE

Silkscreen in Suppl ACR
Contro y
l
Board
ATN 910I AC ANF1C AC 4GE(Oa)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -20ºC to +60ºC Not Not

XPI FE(Eb) (fan cooling) supported supported
ATN 910I-C ANF1C AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -20ºC to +60ºC Supported Not

AC XPB FE(E)+16E1 (fan cooling) supported
ATN 910I- ANF2C AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -20ºC to +65ºC Not Supported

POE XPA FE(E) (fan cooling) supported
ATN 910I DC ANF1C DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -20ºC to +60ºC Not Not

XPI FE(E) (fan cooling) supported supported
ANF1C DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -20ºC to +60ºC Not Not

XPA FE(E)+16E1 (fan cooling) supported supported
ATN 910I-TC ANF1C DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/ -40ºC to +65ºC Supported Not

DC XPB FE(E)+16E1 (fan cooling) supported
ATN 910I-B ANF1C DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE -40ºC to 65ºC Not Not

XPF (COMBO) (natural heat supported supported
dissipation)
ATN 910I-E ANF1C DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE -40ºC to 65ºC Not Not

XPG (COMBO)+16E1 (natural heat supported supported
dissipation)
NOTE
l (O) indicates an SPF cage.
l (E) indicates an RJ-45 electrical interface.
l (COMBO) indicates a COMBO interface.
The following figures show the appearance of the ATN 910I of different models.

Equipment
Figure 2-1 Appearance of the ATN 910I AC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)
Figure 2-2 Appearance of the ATN 910I-C AC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE

(E)+16E1
Figure 2-3 Appearance of the ATN 910I-POE AC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/

FE(E)
Figure 2-4 Appearance of the ATN 910I DC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)
Figure 2-5 Appearance of the ATN 910I DC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)

+16E1
Figure 2-6 Appearance of the ATN 910I-TC DC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE

(E)+16E1

Equipment
Figure 2-7 Appearance of the ATN 910I-TC DC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE

(COMBO)
Figure 2-8 Appearance of the ATN 910I-TC DC with interfaces 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE

(COMBO)+16E1

The ATN 910I can receive and process FE, GE, and E1 service signals, implement service
scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary interface
functions.
Table 2-2 describes functions and features of the ATN 910I.
Table 2-2 Functions and features of the ATN 910I
Function and Feature Description
Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port to

communicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage and
query the equipment.
Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the

external clock/time to obtain the external clock/time
information.
Provides one alarm input/output interface. The interface

provides three inputs of alarm digital parameters.
Ethernet interface function FE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and FE

electrical modules.
GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE
electrical modules.
FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE
electrical modules, GE optical modules, and GE electrical
modules.

Equipment
FE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100

Mbit/s.
FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100
Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s.
Electrical interfaces support the PoE function and a maximum
output power of 30 W (only on the ATN 910I-P AC).
Supports inloops and outloops.
GE interfaces support flow control.
Supports Layer 2 and Layer 3 working modes.
Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous

Ethernet).
Supports IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR.
E1 interface function Supports a 75-ohm or 120-ohm impedance value (based on the

actual E1 cable)
Supports the E1 and CE1 modes.
Supports the PRBS function in framed or unframed mode of

an E1 interface in the receive/transmit direction.
Supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols.
Supports physical-layer clock synchronization.

NOTE
l If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet
or IEEE 1588v2.
l When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet
clock or IEEE 1588v2.
l Only some models of the ATN 910I support the 1588 ACR clock. For details, see 2.1 Appearance.

The ATN 910I consists of the ANF1CXPx, power module, and fan module.
Figure 2-9 describes the functional block diagram of the ATN 910I.

Equipment
Figure 2-9 Functional block diagram of the ATN 910I

Power
Clock input/output interface supply
Time input/output interface Auxiliary
interface Time/clock
NM network interface/serial interface signals Clock Power
module module module
Alarm input/output interface
To other function
modules
Communication control
module To other function
modules
4 x GE optical signals
4 x FE/GE optical signals Service

scheduling and Fan
4 x FE/GE electrical signals processing module
module
16 x E1 signals
4 x FE electrical signals
FE pinch board
Transmit Direction
After buffering and scheduling the service packets, the service scheduling and processing
module performs coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Then the interfaces on the
panel send Ethernet electrical/optical signals and E1 signals out.
Receive Direction
The service access interfaces on the panel receive Ethernet electrical/optical signals and E1
signals. Then the service scheduling and processing module performs serial/parallel conversion
and coding/decoding, and buffers and schedules service packets.
Auxiliary Interface Module

The auxiliary interface module provides the following interfaces:
l External time input/output interface

l External clock input/output interface
l NM serial interface/NM interface used to communicate with the NMS and to manage and
query network elements
l Alarm input/output interface
Communication Control Module

The communication control module provides the following functions:

Equipment
l Configures and monitors the entire system.

l Provides an NM interface or NM serial interface for communication.
Service Scheduling and Processing Module

The service scheduling and processing module provides the following functions:
l Processes service signals received on the interface cards.
l Schedules services with the switching capacity of 12 Gbit/s in full duplex mode.
Clock Module
The clock module provides the following functions:
l Provides a working clock for each module on the board.
l Supports synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol.
l Supports IEEE 1588v2.
l Supports the 1588 ACR clock.
NOTE
Only some models of the ATN 910I support the 1588 ACR clock. For details, see 2.1 Appearance.
Power Module
The power module supplies power for other modules.
NOTE
The ATN 910I supports AC and DC power supplies. For details about power supplies supported by each
product model, see 2.1 Appearance.
Fan Module
The fan module implements heat dissipation for the system.
2.4 Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the ATN 910I panel.
Appearance of the Panel

Figure 2-10 shows the appearance of the ATN 910I panel.
Figure 2-10 Appearance of the ATN 910I panel (ATN 910I DC is used as an example)
PWR STAT ALM ETH/OAM CLK TOD ALMI/ALMO
RST GE0-GE3 FE/GE0-FE/GE3 FE/GE4-FE/GE7 E1(0-15)

Equipment
Indicator
The ATN 910I provides the following indicators:
System indicator
l PWRA/PWRB indicator, green, which indicates the power status

l STAT indicator, red, green, or orange, which indicates the working status
l ALM, red or orange, which indicates the alarm status.
Interface indicator
l LINK/ACT, green or orange, which indicates the connection status/data transceiving status
on the SFP interface.
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of a service port
l ACT indicator, orange, which indicates the receive/transmit status of a service port
Button
There is only one RST button on the ATN 910I for resetting the device.
The RST button can also be used to delete passwords and configuration files on the ATN 910I.
Once you press the RST button, the device starts to reset. Then you press and hold down the
RST button 25s to 35s until the PWR, STA, and ALM indicators blink green. Then release the
RST button so that the device starts to automatically delete passwords and configuration files.
If you keep holding down the RST button (approximately 10s) until the three indicators are not
blinking green simultaneously, the device only resets and does not delete the passwords and
configuration files.
Interface
Table 2-3 describes the interfaces on the ATN 910I and their functions.
Table 2-3 Interfaces on the ATN 910I
Interface Interface Function Description about the

Name Type Corresponding Cable
ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface that can For details, see 10.2
function as an NM interface or Management Cables.
console interface
CLK RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details, see 10.4 Clock
Cables.
TOD RJ-45 Time input/output interface For details, see 10.4 Clock
Cables.
ALMI/O RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface -

Equipment

GE0 to GE3 SFP GE service signal input/output For details, see 10.6
interface Optical Fibers or 10.5.1
Ethernet Cables.
FE/GE0 to SFP FE/GE service signal input/ For details, see 10.6
FE/GE3 output interface Optical Fibers or 10.5.1
Ethernet Cables.
FE/GE4 to RJ-45 FE/GE service signal input/ For details, see 10.5.1
FE/GE7 output interface Ethernet Cables.
E1 (0 to 15) Anea 96 E1 service signal input/output For details, see 10.5.4 75-
interface Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and
10.5.5 120-Ohm 16 x E1
Cables.
NOTE
The SFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module or an electrical module is installed.
The ATN 910I-E device's E1 interface type is DB44. For information about cables to the E1 interface, see
10.5.2 75-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables and 10.5.3 120-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables.
As shown in Table 2-5, the three groups of interfaces on the ATN 910I are controlled by the
license (LANFGEPAYG01 and LANFCOMBO01).
l LANFGEPAYG01 is used for interfaces in group 1. Interfaces in group 1 can be normally

used only after this license is used.
l LANFCOMBO01 is used for interfaces in groups 2 and 3. Interfaces in groups 2 and 3
can be divided into 4 pairs: FE/GE0, FE/GE1, FE/GE2, and FE/GE3. Each pair includes
one SFP interface and one RJ-45 interface.
– When this license is not used, either the SFP or RJ-45 interface in each pair of interfaces
can be used. Among the 8 interfaces in groups 2 and 3, a maximum of 4 interfaces can
be used.
– When this license is used, all of the 8 interfaces in groups 2 and 3 can be normally used.
Figure 2-11 Three groups of interfaces on the ATN 910I

FE/GE0 FE/GE1 FE/GE2 FE/GE3
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Equipment
Pin Assignments
Table 2-4 Pins for the ETH/OAM interface
Front View Pin Function
1 Transmit positive pole of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative pole of the NM interface
87654321 3 Receive positive pole of the NM interface
4 Ground end of the console interface
5 Receive end of the console interface
6 Receive negative pole of the NM interface
7 Unspecified
Table 2-5 Pins for the CLK interface
Front View Pin Working Mode
1 Receive negative pole of the CLK interface
2 Receive positive pole of the CLK interface
87654321 3 Unspecified
4 Transmit negative pole of the CLK interface
5 Transmit positive pole of the CLK interface
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

Equipment
Table 2-6 Pins for the TOD interface
External Time External Time

Input Output
(1 PPS+Time (1 PPS+Time
Information) Information)
1 Unspecified Unspecified
87654321 3 Input negative pole of Output negative pole

1 PPS signals of 1 PPS signals
(RS422 level) (RS422 level)
4 Ground end Ground end
6 Input positive pole of Output positive pole of

1 PPS signals 1 PPS signals
7 Input negative pole of Output negative pole

time information of time information

time information time information
NOTE
The TOD interface can work only in one mode.
Table 2-7 Pins for the ALMI/ALMO interface
1 Boolean input
2 Ground end
87654321 3 Boolean input
4 Boolean input
5 Ground end
6 Ground end
7 Boolean output positive pole

Equipment
8 Boolean output negative pole
Table 2-8 Pins for the GE electrical interface
Front View Pin Usage
1 Positive of twisted pair cable 1
2 Negative of twisted pair cable 1
87654321 3 Positive of twisted pair cable 2
Table 2-9 Pins for the FE interface
1 Positive pole of twisted pair cable 1
2 Negative pole of twisted pair cable 1
87654321 3 Positive pole of twisted pair cable 2
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
6 Negative pole of twisted pair cable 2
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

Equipment
Table 2-10 Pins of the Anea 96 interface
Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14

Equipment
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

ATN 910I provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various
mounting ears, so ATN 910I can be installed in multiple types of cabinets.
As shown in Table 2-11, ATN 910I supports various mounting ears and can be installed in
multiple types of cabinets.

Standard

the device.
N610E
19-inch open rack
IMB network
cabinet
APM30H outdoor
cabinet

ears that are
installed on the
mounting ears
delivered with the
device.

mounting ears
delivered with the
device when the
device needs to be
installed in a 23-
inch cabinet.

Equipment

ATN 910I dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
ATN 910I has many models. Among the models, ATN 910I-B and ATN 910I-E use the natural
heat dissipation mode while the other models dissipate heat by blowing air from left to right.
Figure 2-12 shows the ATN 910I air duct.
Figure 2-12 ATN 910I air duct
l Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on ATN 910I must be kept clean and
unblocked.
l A clearance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on ATN 910I
l The ambient temperature of the ATN 910I-TC DC must be within the range of -40°C to
65°C, and that of ATN 910I in other models must be within the range of -20°C to +60°
C.ATN 910I When ATN 910I is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must
be within the permitted temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent
with that of ATN 910I.
l When ATN 910I is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the
temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of ATN 910I.
For details about temperature range by each product model, see 2.1 Appearance.
l ATN 910 I devices that use the natural heat dissipation mode cannot be stacked, and a 1 U
clearance must be reserved between them.
2.7 Safety Labels

Label Position

Equipment

O ptiX P TN 91 0-F
电源额定值 POWER RATING: ~100-240V;50/60Hz;0.8A MAX
N14036
1类激光产品
HUAWEI 华为技术有限公司中国制造
华为技术有限公司中国制作 HUAW EI TECHN OLGIES CO .,L TD. M ADE IN CHINA
HU AW EI TE CH N OL OGIE S CO.,LTD . MAD E IN C HINA
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis. See Table 2-12.
retrieved by ATN device as the equipment



should be taken for operations.
Heat hazard label This label suggests that the surface

temperature is high and it may cause body
injury (applicable only to devices where
heat is naturally dissipated).

Equipment

HUAWEI
certification.

Equipment
Hardware Description 3 ATN 910B Chassis
3 ATN 910B Chassis
About This Chapter
The ATN 910B uses the chassis of 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and supports multiple installation
3.1 Appearance
The ATN 910B integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a

The ATN 910B can receive and process FE, GE, 10GE, and E1 service signals, implement
service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary
interface functions.

The ATN 910B consists of the CXPx, power module, and fan module.
3.4 Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the ATN 910B panel.

ATN 910B provides multiple installation positions for mounting ears and supports various
mounting ears, so ATN 910B can be installed in multiple types of cabinets.

ATN 910B dissipates heat by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
3.7 Safety Labels


Equipment
3.1 Appearance
The ATN 910B integrates boards and modules, which are not swappable. A chassis has a
Table 3-1 describes multiple models of the ATN 910B.
Table 3-1 Description of the ATN 910B models
Silkscreen Built-in Interface Cross- 1588 ACR

Control Connect
Board Capacity
ATN 910B-A DC ANG1CXPA 2x10GE(O)+8xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/GE(E) 44 Gbit/s Supported

+16E1
ATN 910B-B DC ANG1CXPB 2x10GE(O)+16xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/GE(E) 44 Gbit/s Not

supported
NOTE
l (O) indicates an XFP interface for 10GE services or an SFP interface for GE/FE services.
l (E) indicates an RJ-45 electrical interface.
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 show the appearance of the ATN 910B of different models.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of the ATN 910B-A with interfaces 2x10GE(O)+8xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/

GE(E)+16E1
Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ATN 910B-B with interfaces 2x10GE(O)+16xGE/FE(O)+8xFE/

GE(E)

The ATN 910B can receive and process FE, GE, 10GE, and E1 service signals, implement
service scheduling, support system control, and provide system clock processing and auxiliary
interface functions.

Equipment
Table 3-2 describes functions and features of the ATN 910B.
Table 3-2 Functions and features of the ATN 910B


information.

Ethernet interface function FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE

modules.
10GE XFP interfaces support 10GE optical modules.

GE interfaces support flow control.

Ethernet).
E1 interface function Supports a 75-ohm or 120-ohm impedance value (based on the

actual E1 cable)

Supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols.
Supports physical-layer clock synchronization.

NOTE
or IEEE 1588v2.
l Among the two ATN 910B models, only ATN 910B-A supports 1588 ACR.

Equipment

The ATN 910B consists of the CXPx, power module, and fan module.
Figure 3-3 uses ATN 910B-A as an example to show the working principle and signal flow of
ATN 910B.
Figure 3-3 Functional block diagram of the ATN 910B

Power
Clock input/output interface supply
Time input/output interface Auxiliary
interface Time/clock
NM network interface/serial interface signals Clock Power
module module module
Alarm input/output interface
To other function
modules
Communication control
module To other function
modules
2 x 10GE optical signals

Service
8 x FE/GE optical signals scheduling and Fan
processing module
8 x FE/GE electrical signals module
16 x E1 signals
ANG1MO1 pinch board
Transmit Direction
After buffering and scheduling the service packets, the service scheduling and processing
module performs coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion. Then the interfaces on the
panel send Ethernet electrical/optical signals and E1 signals out.
Receive Direction
The service access interfaces on the panel receive Ethernet electrical/optical signals and E1
signals. Then the service scheduling and processing module performs serial/parallel conversion
and coding/decoding, and buffers and schedules service packets.

The auxiliary interface module provides the following interfaces:

Equipment
l External time input/output interface

l External clock input/output interface
l NM serial interface/NM interface used to communicate with the NMS and to manage and
query network elements
l Alarm input/output interface
Communication Control Module

The communication control module provides the following functions:
l Configures and monitors the entire system.

l Provides an NM interface or NM serial interface for communication.
Service Scheduling and Processing Module

The service scheduling and processing module provides the following functions:
l Processes service signals received on the interface cards.

l Schedules services in full duplex mode.
Clock Module
The clock module provides the following functions:
l Provides a working clock for each module on the board.

l Supports IEEE 1588v2.
Power Module
The power module supplies power for other modules.
Fan Module
The fan module implements heat dissipation for the system.
3.4 Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and interfaces on the ATN 910B panel.
Appearance of the Panel

Figure 3-4 uses ATN 910B-A as an example to show the panels of ATN 910Bl.

Equipment
Figure 3-4 Appearance of the ATN 910B panel

FE/GE: FE/GE:
ETH/ 17|19|21|23 25|27|29|31
PWR STAT ALM OAM CLK E1(8-15)
PWRA RST OUT32 OUT33 E1(0-7)

FE/GE: FE/GE:
PWRB IN32 IN33
16|18|19|20 24|26|28|30
LINK/ ALMI/ TOD
ACT ALMO
Indicator
The ATN 910B provides the following indicators:
System indicator
l PWRA/PWRB indicator, green, which indicates the power status

l ALM, red or orange, which indicates the alarm status.
Interface indicator
l LINK/ACT, green or orange, which indicates the connection status/data transceiving status
on the SFP interface and XFP interface.
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of a service port
l ACT indicator, orange, which indicates the receive/transmit status of a service port
Button
There is only one RST button on the ATN 910B for resetting the device.
The RST button can also be used to delete passwords and configuration files on the ATN 910B.
Once you press the RST button, the device starts to reset. Then you press and hold down the
RST button 10s to 12s until the PWR, STA, and ALM indicators blink green. Then release the
RST button so that the device starts to automatically delete passwords and configuration files.
If you keep holding down the RST button (approximately 10s) until the three indicators are not
blinking green simultaneously, the device only resets and does not delete the passwords and
configuration files.
Interface
Table 3-3 describes the interfaces on the ATN 910B and their functions.

Equipment
Table 3-3 Interfaces on the ATN 910B

ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface that can For details, see 10.2
function as an NM interface or Management Cables.
console interface
CLK RJ-45 Clock input/output interface For details, see 10.4 Clock
Cables.
TOD RJ-45 Time input/output interface For details, see 10.4 Clock
Cables.
ALMI/ RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface -

ALMO
OUT32 XFP 10GE service signal input/ For details, see 10.6
IN32 — output interface Optical Fibers.
OUT33
IN33 (ATN
910B-A)
OUT24
IN24 —
OUT25
IN25 (ATN
910B-A)
FE/GE16 SFP FE/GE service signal input/ For details, see 10.6
— FE/ output interface Optical Fibers or 10.5.1
GE23 (ATN Ethernet Cables.
910B-A)
FE/GE0 —
FE/GE15
(ATN
910B-B)
FE/GE23 RJ-45 FE/GE service signal input/ For details, see 10.5.1
— FE/ output interface Ethernet Cables.
GE31 (ATN
910B-A)
FE/GE16
— FE/
GE23 (ATN
910B-B)
E1 (0–15) DB44 E1 service signal input/output For details, see 10.5.2 75-
(ATN interface Ohm 8 x E1 Cables and
910B-A) 10.5.3 120-Ohm 8 x E1
Cables.

Equipment

NOTE
The SFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module or an electrical module is installed.
The XFP interface can connect to cables only after an optical module is installed.
10GE interfaces on the ATN 910B are under license control (LANG2XGE01). If the license is not loaded,
10GE interfaces are unavailable. GE interfaces are also under license control (LANGGEPAYG01 and
LANG4GEPAYG01). If the license is not loaded, only a maximum of eight interfaces can be used.
Pin Assignments
Table 3-4 Pins for the ETH/OAM interface
1 Transmit positive pole of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative pole of the NM interface
87654321 3 Receive positive pole of the NM interface
4 Ground end of the console interface
6 Receive negative pole of the NM interface
7 Unspecified
Table 3-5 Pins for the CLK interface
1 Receive negative pole of the CLK

interface
2 Receive positive pole of the CLK

87654321 interface
3 Unspecified
4 Transmit negative pole of the CLK

interface
5 Transmit positive pole of the CLK

interface
6 Unspecified

Equipment
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 3-6 Pins for the TOD interface
External Time External Time

Input Output
(1 PPS+Time (1 PPS+Time
87654321 3 Input negative pole of Output negative pole

1 PPS signals of 1 PPS signals
6 Input positive pole of 1 Output positive pole of

PPS signals 1 PPS signals
7 Input negative pole of Output negative pole

time information of time information

time information time information
NOTE
The TOD interface can work only in one mode.

Equipment
Table 3-7 Pins for the ALMI/ALMO interface
1 Boolean input
2 Ground end
87654321 3 Boolean input
4 Boolean input
5 Ground end
6 Ground end
7 Boolean output positive pole
8 Boolean output negative pole
Table 3-9 Pins of the DB44 interface
Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage

1 38 R0 15 T0
44 23 30
37 R1 14 T1
22 29
36 R2 13 T2
21 28

Equipment
Front View Pin Usage Pin Usage
35 R3 12 T3
20 27
34 R4 11 T4
19 26
33 R5 10 T5
18 25
32 R6 9 T6
17 24
31 R7 8 T7
16 7

As shown in Table 3-10, ATN 910B supports various mounting ears and can be installed in

Standard

the device.
N610E
19-inch open rack
IMB network
cabinet
APM30H outdoor
cabinet

Equipment

Standard

ears that are
installed on the
mounting ears
delivered with the
device.

mounting ears
delivered with the
device when the
device needs to be
installed in a 23-
inch cabinet.

Figure 3-5 ATN 910B air duct
≥50 mm
≥50 mm
l Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on ATN 910B must be kept clean
and unblocked.
l A clearance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on ATN 910B
l The ambient temperature of ATN 910B must be within the range of -40 °C to +65 °C. When
ATN 910B is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside the cabinet must be within the
permitted temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be consistent with that of
ATN 910B.

Equipment
3.7 Safety Labels

Label Position

O ptiX P TN 91 0-F
电源额定值 POWER RATING: ~100-240V;50/60Hz;0.8A MAX
N14036
1类激光产品
华为技术有限公司中国制作 HUAW EI TECHN OLGIES CO .,L TD. M ADE IN CHINA
HU AW EI TE CH N OL OGIE S CO.,LTD . MAD E IN C HINA
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis. See Table 3-11.
retrieved by ATN device as the equipment



Equipment

should be taken for operations.
HUAWEI
certification.

Equipment
4 ATN 950B Chassis
About This Chapter
The ATN 950B uses the chassis of 2 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm) and supports multiple installation
The ATN 950B can be flexibly deployed with high reliability and scalability. It has the following
features:
l Two power boards are supported for redundancy protection.

l Two control boards are supported for redundancy protection.
l The fan board provides six fans, ensuring proper heat dissipation even when a fan is faulty.
l Six slots can be flexibly configured with service boards.
4.1 Appearance
The ATN 950B provides 11 slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at
each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks.

This section describes slot distribution on the ATN 950B.


4.5 Safety Labels


Equipment
4.1 Appearance
The ATN 950B provides 11 slots and all boards are swappable. A chassis has a mounting ear at
each side and can be installed in different cabinets and racks.
Figure 4-1 shows the appearance of the ATN 950B that has boards fully configured.
Figure 4-1 Appearance of the ATN 950B that has boards fully configured
Figure 4-2 shows the appearance of the ATN 950B that does not have boards fully configured.
Figure 4-2 Appearance of the ATN 950B that does not have boards fully configured

This section describes slot distribution on the ATN 950B.
Figure 4-3 shows the slot distribution of the ATN 950B equipped with the AND1CXPA or
AND1CXPB board.

Equipment
Figure 4-3 Slot distribution of the ATN 950B equipped with AND1CXPA or AND1CXPB
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
SLOT
10 SLOT 5 (10GE/GE) SLOT 6 (10GE/GE)
SLOT
11 SLOT 3 (10GE/4 x GE) SLOT 4 (10GE/4 x GE)
SLOT
9 SLOT 1 (8 x GE) SLOT 2 (8 x GE)
NOTE
When ATN 950B is equipped with the AND1CXPA board, each of slots 3 and 4 has a bandwidth of 4 x
GE and does not support 10GE interface boards.
Figure 4-4 shows the slot distribution of the ATN 950B equipped with the AND2CXPB/
AND2CXPE board.
Figure 4-4 Slot distribution of the ATN 950B equipped with AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
SLOT
SLOT
SLOT
Table 4-1 describes priorities of slots where boards supported by the ATN 950B can be inserted.
Table 4-1 Priorities of available slots
Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending Order)
AND1CXPA/ Slot 7, slot 8 slot 7 - slot 8

AND1CXPB
AND2CXPB/
AND2CXPE
AND1EM8T/ slot 1 or slot 2 slot 1 - slot 2

AND1EM8F
AND1EM4T/ slot 3- slot 4 - slot 1 - slot 2

AND1EM4F/
AND1EM4C
AND2CQ1B slot 1 to slot 6 slot 3- slot 4 - slot 1 - slot 2 - slot 5 - slot 6

AND2PQ1

Equipment
Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending Order)
AND1EX1 slot 5-6 (working with the slot 5 - slot 6 - slot 3 - slot 4
AND1CXPA)
slot 3-6 (working with the
AND1CXPB)
slot 1-6 (working with the
AND2CXPB/
AND2CXPE)
AND1ML1/ slot 1 to slot 6 slot 4 - slot 6 - slot 3 - slot 5 - slot 2 - slot 1

AND1ML1A
AND3ML1A/
AND3ML1B
AND2MD1A/
AND2MD1B
TND1PIU Slot 9, slot 10 -
AND1FAN slot 11 -

As shown in Table 4-2, ATN 950B supports various mounting ears and can be installed in

Standard

the device.
N610E
19-inch open rack
IMB network
cabinet
APM30H outdoor
cabinet

Equipment

Standard

ears that are
installed on the
mounting ears
delivered with the
device.

mounting ears
delivered with the
device when the
device needs to be
installed in a 23-
inch cabinet.
ATN 950B provides three installation positions for mounting ears. Users can determine an
installation position for mounting ears based on the depth of the cabinet. Figure 4-5 shows the
installation positions of mounting ears. Position 1 shows a pair of mounting ears delivered with
ATN 950B.
Figure 4-5 Installation positions of mounting ears
Already installed
mounting ears
Position 3 for installing Position 1 for installing

the mounting ears the mounting ears
Position 2 for installing

the mounting ears
Determine an installation position for mounting ears based on the cabinet depth. The following
figures show the installation dimensions when mounting ears are installed in different positions.

Equipment
Figure 4-6 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (IEC)
Unit: mm
220
76.2
465.1
224
208
132.5

Equipment
Figure 4-7 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (ETSI)
Unit: mm
220
50
515
241.5
225.5
150

Equipment
Figure 4-8 Determine an installation position for mounting ears (23-inch)
Unit: mm
220
76.2
566.7
218
202
126.5
NOTE
When installing the ATN 950B in the cabinet, reserve 80 mm space at the front of the panel for cabling.


Equipment
Figure 4-9 ATN 950B Air duct
l Heat dissipation holes of air intake and exhaust vents on ATN 950B must be kept clean
and unblocked.
l A distance of at least 50 mm must be reserved at the air intake/exhaust vent on ATN 950B
l Filler panels must be installed on unused slots. In addition, on ATN 950B, heat must be
dissipated by drawing in air from the left and expelling out the air from the right.
l The ambient temperature of ATN 950B must be within the range of -20°C to +65°C (When
the device is equipped with AND1CXPAs or AND1CXPBs, the ambient temperature must
range from -20ºC to 60ºC). When ATN 950B is installed in a cabinet, temperature inside
the cabinet must be within the temperature range and the air duct of the cabinet must be
consistent with that of ATN 950B.
4.5 Safety Labels

Label Position

ATN 950
1类激光产品
N14036
この装置は、クラスA情報技術装置です。この装置を家庭環境で
使用すゐと電波妨害を引き起こすことがぁります。この場合には使用
者が適切な対策を講ずゐよぅ要求されゐことがぁります。 VCCI -A

华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAW EI TEC HNOLOGIES CO.,L TD. M ADE IN C HIN A HUAWE I TE CHNO LG I E S CO ., LTD . MADE IN CHINA

Equipment
Label Description
There are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table 4-3.
retrieved by ATN 950B as the equipment
ESD protection label The label suggests the electrostatic-

sensitive equipment.


Fan warning label The label suggests that do not touch the fan
leaves when the fan is rotating.
Operation warning label The label indicates the precaution that

should be taken for operations on the PIU
! board. For details, see Label.
HUAWEI
certification.

Equipment
Hardware Description 5 ATN 910 Boards
5 ATN 910 Boards
About This Chapter
Boards on ATN 910 are used together to provide various functions.
5.1 Board Overview

A board mainly consists of the printed circuit board (PCB) and the front panel.
5.2 Board Type and Application

This section describes the applications and differences between different types of PIC boards.
5.3 ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit

The ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL (CXPI/CXPL for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol
processing board. The function version of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL is ANC1. The
ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL is housed in slots 1 and 2.
5.4 AND1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic Interface Board

The AND1EG4T board (EG4T for short) is a 4 channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface
board whose functional version is AND1. The AND1EG4T board can be housed in any of slots
3 and 4 in the chassis.
5.5 AND1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface Board

The AND1EF8T (EF8T for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet electric interface board. The
function version of the EF8T is AND1. The EF8T is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.6 AND1EG2 - 2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board

The AND1EG2 (EG2 for short) is a two channels GE optical interface board. The function
version of the EG2 is AND1. The AND1EG2 is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.7 AND1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical Interface Board

The AND1EG4F (EG4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive optical interface board .
The function version of the EG4F is AND1. The AND1EG4F is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.8 AND1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface Board

The AND1EF8F (EF8F for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet optical interface board. The
function version of the EF8F is AND1. The AND1EF8F is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.9 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board

Equipment
The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A (ML1/ML1A for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board. The

function version of the ML1/ML1A is AND1. The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A is housed in slot
3 or slot 4.
5.10 AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board

The AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B (ML1A/ML1B for short) is a 16 channels E1 interface board.
The function version of the ML1A/ML1B is AND2. The AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B is housed
in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.11 AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface Board

The AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B (MD1A/MD1B for short) is a 32 channels E1 interface board.
The function version of the MD1A/MD1B is AND1. The AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B is housed
5.12 AND1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board

The AND1MO1C (MO1C for short) is an 8-channel electrical interface board, whose functional
version is AND1. The AND1MO1C can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.13 AND1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface Board

The AND1AVD8A (AVD8A for short) is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1AVD8A can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.14 AND1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface Board

The AND1AVD8B (AVD8B for short) is an 8-channel VDSL2 (compatible with ADSL2+)
service interface board, whose functional version is AND1. The AND1AVD8B can be housed
in slot 3 or 4.
5.15 AND1SHD4 - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface Board

The AND1SHD4 (SHD4 for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1SHD4 can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.16 AND1SHD4I - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Interface Board for IMA Mode

The AND1SHD4I (SHD4I for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1SHD4I can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.17 TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board

The TNC1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is
TNC1. The PIU is housed in slot 5.
5.18 ANC1FAN - Fan Board

The ANC1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is ANC1.
The FAN is housed in slot 6.
5.19 Filler Panel

A filler panel is used to cover any vacant slot in a chassis.

Equipment
5.1 Board Overview

Board Structure
Figure 5-1 shows the structure of a board (using the AND1EG4F board as an example).
Figure 5-1 Board structure
A board mainly consists of the following parts:

l PCB
The PCB houses various functional chips of the board and is the most important part of the
board. Through the front panel, the PCB provides indicators, buttons, and ports.
NOTE
Different boards provide different indicators, buttons, and ports; not all boards support a daughter
board. For details, see the description of each board.
l Front panel, including the captive screws, ejector levers, indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
– Captive screws: secure the board in the subrack.
– Ejector levers: used for inserting or removing the board. Bar codes are also attached on
the ejector levers.
NOTE
The ejector lever on the left side of the front panel of a board is attached with a label marking the bar code
of the board. The bar code of a control board will be retrieved by ATN 910 as the equipment serial number
(ESN).
The ESN is used for applying for a license. ATN 910 automatically reads the bar code of the backplane or
control board as the device ESN. Generally, the bar code of the backplane takes precedence over that of
the control board.
Board Naming
NOTE
The preceding only describes how to roughly identify a board. For details on board specifications, see board
descriptions.

Equipment
A board name mainly consists of the board functional version and short name. A short name can
roughly identify a board. The short name of a control board, power board, and fan board is CXPx,
PIU, and FAN respectively. The following mainly describes how to quickly identify a physical
interface board through the short name of a board.
As shown in Figure 5-2, the short name of a board consists of an abbreviated board name and
an extended name. An abbreviated board name includes the board type, interface quantity, and
interface rate. When boards have the same abbreviated board name, they can be differentiated
using extended names. An extended name does not have special meanings and can be omitted.
Figure 5-2 Board short name (using ML1A as an example)
ML1A
Extended name
Interface rate
Interface quantity
Board type
The following describes each part of an abbreviated board name:
l Board type M indicates an E-carrier or T-carrier interface board. The interface quantity is
represented using O, L or D, indicating 8, 16 or 32 respectively. The interface rate is
represented using 1, indicating E1 or T1.
l Board type AVD indicates an ADSL2+, VDSL2, or ADSL2+/VDSL2 interface board. The
interface quality is represented using an Arabic numeral, but the interface rate is not
represented.
l Board type SHD indicates a G.SHDSL interface board. The interface quality is represented
using an Arabic numeral, but the interface rate is not represented.
l Board type E indicates an Ethernet interface board. The interface quality is represented
using an Arabic numeral. The interface rate is represented using F or G, indicating FE or
GE respectively. Extended name F or T is used to indicate an optical interface or electrical
interface respectively.
NOTE
For the name of an Ethernet interface board, the interface rate and quantity rate are in an order opposite
to those for the names of other boards. For example, in EG4F (a name of an Ethernet interface board),
interface rate G comes before interface quantity 4.
Board Relationship
A control board mainly implements system control and service grooming, and receives and
processes various services by working with physical interface boards. A power board provides
power inputs for the system. A fan board blows air to dissipate heat generated during system
operation. Figure 5-3 shows the board relationship.

Equipment
Figure 5-3 Board relationship
User side Control and Network side

management module
Clock module
FE FE
GE GE
FE FE
EF8F/EF8T EF8F/EF8T
GE GE
EG2/EG4F EG2/EG4F
E1 E1
ML1/ML1A/ML1B Service ML1/ML1A/ML1B
E1 processing and E1
MD1A/MD1B switching module MD1A/MD1B
T1 T1
MO1C MO1C
ADSL2+
AVD8A
VDSL2
AVD8B
G.SHDSL
SHD4/SHD4I
Control board
CXPI/CXPL
Power interface board Fan board

PIU FAN

5.2.1 Board Type

Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment. Boards on the ATN 910 are classified
into the following types: control board (CXP), physical interface card (PIC), power interface
board (PIU), and fan board (FAN).
Control Board (CXP)

The control board controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides
auxiliary interfaces.
NOTE
The control board of the ATN 910 also provides the E1 interface and Ethernet service interface. For details
about applications of the service interface boards, see the E1 service interface board, and the Ethernet
service interface board.

Equipment
Table 5-1 Control boards supported by the ATN 910
Board Name Board Description Supported

Version
ANC2CXPI System control, switching and timing board, with V200R002C00

4 x FE service electrical interfaces, with 4 x FE
service optical interfaces, and 2 x GE service
optical interfaces
ANC2CXPL System control, switching and timing board, with V200R002C00

4 x FE/GE service electrical interfaces, with 4 x FE/
GE service optical interfaces, and 2 x GE service
optical interfaces
Physical Interface Card (PIC)

The physical interface boards process the services with the control board.
The physical interface boards are classified into the following types based on the service access
mode: Ethernet service interface boards, E1/T1 service interface boards, and xDSL service
interface boards.
Table 5-2 Ethernet service interface boards supported by the ATN 910
Board Name Board Description Supported Version
AND1EF8T 8 x FE service interface board (electric V200R001C00

interface)
AND1EF8F 8 x FE service interface board (optical V200R001C00

interface)
AND1EG2 2 x GE service optical interface board V200R001C00
AND1EG4F 4 x FE/GE adaptive optical interface board V200R001C00
AND1EG4T 4 x FE/GE adaptive electric interface board V200R001C01
Table 5-3 E1/T1 service interface boards supported by the ATN 910
AND1ML1 16 x E1 service interface board (75 ohm) V200R001C01
AND1ML1A 16 x E1 service interface board (120 ohm) V200R001C01
AND2ML1A 16 x E1 service interface board (75 ohm) V200R001C00
AND2ML1B 16 x E1 service interface board (120 ohm) V200R001C00
AND1MD1A 32 x E1 service interface board (75 ohm) V200R001C00

Equipment
AND1MD1B 32 x E1 service interface board (120 ohm) V200R001C00
AND1MO1C 8 x T1 service interface board (100 ohm) V200R001C01
Table 5-4 xDSL service interface boards supported by the ATN 910
AND1AVD8A 8 x ADSL2+ interface board V200R001C01
AND1AVD8B 8 x VDSL2 interface board V200R003C00
AND1SHD4 4 x G.SHDSL interface board V200R001C01

(supporting the ATM mode and EFM
mode)
AND1SHD4I 4 x G.SHDSL interface board V200R001C01

(supporting the IMA mode)
Power Board
Power boards lead in power for supplying power to the device. For details about power
distribution, see Power Distribution.
Table 5-5 Power boards supported by the ATN 910
TNC1PIU Power interface board V200R001C00
Fan Board (FAN)

The fan board exhausts hot air for heat dissipation. For details about air duct, see Heat
Dissipation.
Table 5-6 Fan board supported by the ATN 910
ANC1FAN Fan board V200R001C00

Equipment
5.2.2 Ethernet Service Interface Board

The ATN 910 supports multiple types of Ethernet interface boards to address requirements for
various interface quantities, interface rates, and interface types (optical/electrical).
Ethernet service interface boards are widely used in various network environments. They can
accept base station services on the user side, and transmit services upstream on the network side.
The Ethernet service interface board supports Layer 2 services, Layer 3 services, and hybrid
transmission of Layer 2 and Layer 3 services. (When the main interface is in Layer 2 mode,
configure the sub-interface to transmit Layer 2/Layer 3 services.)
Table 5-7 shows the Ethernet service interface boards supported by the ATN 910 and the
differences between the boards.
Table 5-7 Ethernet service interface boards
Board Interface Description
AND1EG4T 4 x FE/GE electrical interface
AND1EF8T 8 x FE electrical interface
AND1EG2 2 x GE SFP interface
AND1EG4F 4 x FE/GE SFP interface
AND1EF8F 8 x FE SFP interface
ANC2CXPI 4 x FE electrical interface

4 x FE SFP interface
2 x GE SFP interface
ANC2CXPL 4 x FE/GE electrical interface

4 x FE/GE SFP interface
2 x GE SFP interface
NOTE
l Electrical interfaces:
l FE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
l FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s.
l SFP interfaces:
l FE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and FE electrical modules.
l GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE electrical modules.
l FE/GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE electrical modules, FE optical
modules and FE electrical modules.
5.2.3 E1 Service Interface Board

The E1 service interface board supports ATM, PPP, and TDM link-layer protocols.

Equipment
ATM
Figure 5-4 shows the application of the E1 service interface board using the ATM protocol.
Figure 5-4 Application of the E1 service interface board using the ATM protocol
An ATN device uses the E1 service interface board on the user side to support ATM over E1.
When the ATM service access rate is between E1 and E3, multiple E1 links are bound into an
IMA group to increase service bandwidth. On the network side, the E1 service interface board
implements ATM service emulation and transparently transmits the ATM services over the
packet switched network (PSN), such as MPLS or Ethernet. For detailed information, see the
chapter "ATM IMA application" in the Feature Description.
PPP
Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 show the applications of the E1/T1 service interface board using the
PPP protocol.
Figure 5-5 Application of the E1/T1 service interface board using the PPP protocol (user side)
Figure 5-6 Application of the E1 service interface board using the PPP protocol (network side)
The ATN device uses the E1/T1 service interface board to support IP/MPLS services carried
over ML-PPPs on both user side and network side. For example, in the Offload scenario, services
(such as voice service) that require high reliability can be carried over an SDH network through
E1 private lines using ML-PPP.

Equipment
NOTE
An independent PPP link cannot carry service. PPP links must be added to an ML-PPP group to carry
services.
TDM
Figure 5-7 shows the application of the E1/T1 service interface board using the TDM protocol.
Figure 5-7 Application of the E1 service interface board using the TDM protocol
The ATN device uses the E1 service interface board to access the TDM service, encapsulate the
service signals into packets, and transparently transmit the packets through PWs over the PSN
network. This achieves CES service emulation. For detailed information, see the chapter "CES
application" in the Feature Description.
Comparison Between E1 Service Interface Boards

Table 5-8 shows the E1/T1 service interface boards supported by the ATN device and the
Table 5-8 E1/T1 service interface boards
Function ANC2CXPG AND1ML1 AND2ML1A AND1MD1A AND1MO1C

AND1ML1A AND2ML1B AND1MD1B
Interface type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1
Number of 16 16 16 32 8
interfaces
Interface 75 ohms or 120 AND1ML1: 75 AND2ML1A: AND1MD1A: 100 ohms

impedance ohms (based on ohms 75 ohms 75 ohms
the actual AND1ML1A: AND2ML1B: AND1MD1B:
configurations) 120 ohms 120 ohms 120 ohms
Interface clock Master/slave Master clock Master/slave Master/slave Master/slave

mode clock mode mode clock mode clock mode clock mode
Link-layer ATM, PPP, ATM, PPP, ATM, PPP, ATM, PPP, PPP, TDM
protocols TDM TDM TDM TDM

Equipment
Function ANC2CXPG AND1ML1 AND2ML1A AND1MD1A AND1MO1C

Minimum 1 2 1 1 -
number of
timeslots in CE1
mode
5.2.4 xDSL Service Interface Board

The xDSL service interface board has similar functions to the xDSL modem, which enables
higher reliability and easy management. The xDSL service interface board on an ATN device
can be configured on the network side to transmit services upstream through xDSL signals.
When no optical fiber is available, an ATN device can use the xDSL interface board to transmit
base station services upstream through the existing copper lines.
Figure 5-8 shows the position of the xDSL service interface board on a network.
Figure 5-8 Network application of xDSL services
ATN boards support the following xDSL technologies:
l ADSL2+: has a long delay and asymmetric upstream and downstream bandwidth. The
downstream bandwidth is higher than the upstream bandwidth. Therefore, the ADSL2+ is
suitable to carry data services, especially HSDPA services.
l VDSL2 is compatible with ADSL2+. VDSL2 has symmetrical upstream and downstream
bandwidths, and 100 Mbit/s transmission in a short distance within 300 m. It is suitable to
carry voice services, data services, and video services.
l G.SHDSL: has a stable delay and symmetric upstream and downstream bandwidth.
Compared with the ADSL2+, the G.SHDSL is suitable to carry high-priority services, such
as voice services.
The combination of ADSL2+ line and G.SHDSL line meets requirements on data and voice
services access. In addition, the Offload is also an important scenario in the mobile
communication network. In other words, the received base station services are classified and
transmitted by ATN devices. Traditional voice services (2G, 3G R99 CS) are transmitted using
the E1 private line to ensure high QoS, low delay, and high reliability. High-bandwidth packet
services, such as HSDPA services with low requirements on delay, are backhauled using the
xDSL technology. For detailed information, see the chapter "xDSL application" in the Feature
Description.

Equipment
Table 5-9 shows the xDSL service interface boards supported by ATN devices and the
Table 5-9 xDSL service interface boards
Item AND1AVD8A AND1AVD8A AND1SHD4 AND1SHD4I
xDSL technology ADSL2+ ADSL2+ G.SHDSL G.SHDSL

VDSL2
Number of 8 8 4 4
interfaces
Number of binding 4 4 1 1
groups
Working mode ATM mode ATM mode ATM mode IMA mode
PTM mode EFM mode
Maximum upstream 1.024 Mbit/s 50 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 2.3 Mbit/s

rate
Maximum 24 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 2.3 Mbit/s

downstream rate
NTR clock Not supported Not supported Supported Supported

NOTE
The AND1SHD4 in ATM mode supports SHDSL.bis.
Both the AND1SHD4 and AND1SHD4I support one binding group. The difference is as follows:
l When the AND1SHD4 is in ATM mode, interface binding needs to be manually configured. When the AND1SHD4 is in EFM
mode, the ATN device automatically adapts to the interface binding configuration on the DSLAM.
l The IMA binding group of the AND1SHD4I has a fixed number of member links, that is, 4. No manual configuration is
required.
5.3 ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL - System Control, Cross-

connect, and Multi-protocol Process Unit
The ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL (CXPI/CXPL for short) is a control, cross-connect, and protocol
processing board. The function version of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL is ANC1. The
ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL is housed in slots 1 and 2.
5.3.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the appearances of the front panels of the ANC2CXPI/
ANC2CXPL.

Equipment
Figure 5-9 Appearance of the front panel of the ANC2CXPI
Figure 5-10 Appearance of the front panel of the ANC2CXPL
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the ANC1CXPI:
l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program
l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status
l SRV indicator, which is reserved for later use
l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms
l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms
l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms
l GE L/A0 to GE L/A1, FE L/A0 to FE L/A3 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the
connection status of the port
NOTE
l Five pairs of Link and ACT indicators located above ETH/OAM interfaces and four FE service
interfaces on the ANC2CXPI, which indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
l Five pairs of Link and ACT indicators located above ETH/OAM interfaces and four FE service
interfaces on the ANC2CXPL, which indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.
For details on indications of indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Buttons
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the ANC1CXPI:
l RST button, which is used for warm reset of the board. When you press the RST button
and then release it, the board is reset (warm).
l CF RCV button, which is used to restore the configuration data from the CF card. When
you hold down the CF RCV button for five seconds, the equipment automatically restores
the configuration data from the CF card.
l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button,
except the service port indicators on the AND1EF8T, AND1EF8F, AND1AVD8A,
AND1SHD4, AND1SHD4I, all the board indicators on the NE are on.

Equipment
Interfaces
Table 5-10 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL.
Table 5-10 Interfaces on the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL
Board Interface Interface Usage Corresponding

Name Type Cable
ANC2CXPI ETH/OAM RJ-45 10M/100M interface for NM network For details, see 10.2
ANC2CXPL port or NM serial port Management Cables.
ANC2CXPI CLK0/ RJ-45 External time/clock input/output For details, see 10.4
ANC2CXPL TOD0 interface Clock Cables.
CLK1/
TOD1
ANC2CXPI ALMI/O RJ-45 Alarm input/output interface -

ANC2CXPL
ANC2CXPI GE0, GE1 SFP Input/output interface for GE optical/ For details, see 10.6
ANC2CXPL electrical signals Optical Fibers and
10.5.1 Ethernet
Cables.
ANC2CXPI FE0 to FE3 SFP Input/output interface for FE optical For details, see 10.6
signals Optical Fibers.
ANC2CXPL FE/GE0 to SFP Input/output interface for FE/GE For details, see 10.6
FE/GE3 optical signals Optical Fibers and
10.5.1 Ethernet
Cables.
ANC2CXPI FE4 to FE7 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE electrical For details, see 10.5.1
signals Ethernet Cables.
ANC2CXPL FE/GE4 to RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE/GE For details, see 10.5.1
FE/GE7 electrical signals Ethernet Cables.
Table 5-11 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface
1 Transmit positive of the NM network port
2 Transmit negative of the NM network port
87654321 3 Receive positive of the NM network port
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port

Equipment
6 Receive negative of the NM network port
7 Unspecified
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 5-12 Pins of the CLK0/TOD0 and CLK1/TOD1 interfaces
External External Time Input External Time Output

Clock (1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
1 Receive Unspecified Unspecified

negative of the
CLK
87654321 2 Receive Unspecified Unspecified
positive of the
CLK
3 Unspecified Input negative for the Output negative for the

1PPS signal 1PPS signal
4 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end

negative of the
CLK
5 Transmit Grounding end Grounding end

positive of the
CLK
6 Unspecified Input positive for the Output positive for the

1PPS signal 1PPS signal
7 Unspecified Input negative for the time Output negative for the
information time information
8 Unspecified Input positive for the time Output positive for the
information time information
NOTE
The CLK0/TOD0 and CLK1/TOD1 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding three working
modes.

Equipment
Table 5-13 Pins of the ALMI/O interface
1 Input for the digital parameter
2 Grounding end
87654321 3 Input for the digital parameter
5 Grounding end
6 Grounding end
7 Positive output for the digital

parameter
8 Negative output for the digital

parameter
Table 5-14 Description of the SFP interface
Interface on Supported Interface Usage

the Front Modules Type
Panel
GE0, GE1 GE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for GE optical signals
GE electrical RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface
FE0 to FE3 FE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for FE optical signals
FE/GE0 to FE/ FE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for FE optical signals

GE3
GE optical module LC Input/Output interfaces for GE optical signals
GE electrical RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE electrical signals

interface
NOTE
The GE SFP interface on the front panel can function as either an optical interface or an electrical interface.
When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when the SFP interface
functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module.

Equipment
Table 5-15 Pins of the FE electrical interface (FE4 to FE7)
1 Positive of twisted pair 1
2 Negative of twisted pair 1
87654321 3 Positive of twisted pair 2
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 5-16 Pins of the GE electrical interface (FE/GE4 to FE/GE7)
5.3.2 Functions and Features

The ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL transmits, accesses and processes FE/GE signals, grooms
services, performs the system control, processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary
interfaces.
Table 5-17 lists the functions and features of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL.

Equipment
Table 5-17 Functions and features of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL
Basic function Cross-connect capacity ANC2CXPI: 6.8 Gbit/s

ANC2CXPL: 12 Gbit/s
The ANC2CXPI provides four FE electrical interfaces, four

FE SFP interfaces, and two GE SFP interfaces.
The ANC2CXPL provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces,

four FE/GE SFP interfaces, and two GE SFP interfaces.
Supports the hot swappable function.
Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.


information.

Ethernet interface function FE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and FE

electrical modules.
GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules and GE
electrical modules.
FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules, FE
modules.
FE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100

Mbit/s.
GE interfaces support the traffic control function.

Ethernet).

Equipment

NOTE
or IEEE 1588v2.
5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and
communication module, service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power
supply module.
Figure 5-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle (using an ANC2CXPL as an
example).
Figure 5-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the ANC1CXPL
Two external time/clock

Backplane
input/output interfaces Two external
time/clock signals Clock signal Interface
NMS network port Auxiliary
or NMS serial port Each Clock Clock boards
interface
module signal module
Alarm input/output module on the
interface board
NMS
Alarm signal
signal
Control and Management bus Interface
communication boards
module
Management bus
2 x GE signals
Service
4 x FE/GE optical signals grooming and Service bus
Interface
processing boards
4 x FE/GE electrical signals module
3.3V Interface
Power 12V boards
Each module Working power supply FAN
on the board supply -48V/-60V
System
module power supply
-48V/-60V System
power supply

Equipment

This module performs the following functions:
l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.
l Provides one NM serial port or NM network port for communicating with the NMS,
managing the equipment, and querying the equipment.
l Reserves one alarm input/output interface.
Control and Communication Module

l Configures and monitors the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL and the entire system.

l Enables the communication through the NM serial port or NM network port.
Service Grooming and Processing Module

l Accesses and processes 2 x GE optical/electrical signals.

l Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals.
l Accesses and processes 4 x FE optical signals.
l Processes the service signals accessed by the interface boards.
l Grooms services with 6.8 Gbit/s switching capacity in the full-duplex mode.
l Accesses and processes 4 x FE (ANC2CXPI) optical signals and 4 x FE/GE (ANC2CXPL)
optical signals.
l Accesses and processes 4 x FE (ANC2CXPI) electrical signals and 4 x FE/GE
(ANC2CXPL) electrical signals.
l Processes the service signals accessed by the interface boards.
l Grooms services with 6.8 Gbit/s (ANC2CXPI) and 12 Gbit/s (ANC2CXPL) switching
capacity in the full-duplex mode.
Clock Module
l Provides the system clock signals and processes the clock signals from the service boards
and the external clock/time interfaces.
l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPI.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol.
l Supports the IEEE 1588V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module


Equipment
l Accesses two -48 V or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPI.
l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.
l Supplies 3.3 V power for the interface board.
5.3.4 CF Card and DIP Switch

A board has a set of DIP switches and a hot-swappable CF card.
CF Card and DIP Switch Locations

Figure 5-12 shows the locations of the CF card and DIP switches on ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL.
Figure 5-12 Locations of the CF card and DIP switches on ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL.

CF Card DIP Switch
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
CF Card
The size of the CF card on ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL is 512 MB. The CF card is used to backup
data and load packages.

Equipment
DIP Switch
NOTICE
l This operation should be executed with caution. Use it under the guidance of technical
personnel.
l After the configuration file is deleted, reset the DIP switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0. In this way,
you do not need to delete the configuration file at each startup.
l The numeral indicates 1, and the letter indicates 0.
l The device password is deleted when the configuration file is deleted.
You can use the DIP switches to delete the configuration file loaded on the device.
Set DIP switches on ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL to 1, 1, 0, and 1. During startup, the device deletes
the loaded configuration file based on the DIF switch status.After the password is deleted, you
are required to enter a new password when a PC is connected to the device through the console
interface.
NOTE
If no PC is connected to the device through the console interface, you can check whether the password is
deleted based on the indicator status. The password is deleted at the stage when the BIOS is guiding the
upper-layer software during the device startup. At this stage, the green PROG indicator is on for 300 ms
and off for 300 ms.
To reset the DIP switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0, you are advised to remove the board after the STAT and PROG
indicators become green.
5.3.5 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL cover the interface specifications,
board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Interface Specifications
l For the specifications of the FE electrical interface, see Table 5-18.
l For the specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface, see Table 5-19.
l For the specification of the swappable FE optical/electrical modules supported at an FE
(SFP) interface, see Table 5-20 and Table 5-22.
l For the specifications of the swappable GE optical/electrical modules supported at a GE
(SFP) interface, see Table 5-21 and Table 5-23.
l For the specifications of the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported at an
FE/GE (SFP) interface, see Table 5-20, Table 5-21, Table 5-22, and Table 5-23.
NOTE
The specifications of an SFP interface on a board depend on the optical/electrical module on the board.
For the specifications of the optical/module modules on a board, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical
Modules.

Equipment
Table 5-18 Specifications of the FE electrical interface
Item Specification Requirement
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise

specification regulations.
Table 5-19 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s.

Table 5-20 Information about FE optical modules
Code Optical Module Information Remarks
S4015755 eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km Two-fiber

bidirectional
S4015715 eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
Commercial
34060282 eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
34060363 eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1550 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Single-fiber

bidirectional
34060364 eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/Rx 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
Commercial
Table 5-21 Information about GE optical modules
34060286 eSFP, 850 nm, LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km Two-fiber

bidirectional
34060473 eSFP, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km
Commercial
S4016954 eSFP, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km
34060483 eSFP, 1471nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Two-fiber

bidirectional
34060481 eSFP, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km
CWDM
34060479 eSFP, 1511nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km Commercial

Equipment

bidirectional
Commercial
Table 5-22 Information about FE Electrical Module
Code Electrical Module Information
34100101 100BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, 100 m
Table 5-23 Information about GE Electrical Module
34100052 1000BASE-T, RJ45, SFP Electrical Module, Auto Negotiate, 100 m
Other Specifications
Board dimensions (mm): 20.3 (H) x 226.0 (D) x 388.4 (W)(0.80 in.×8.90 in.×15.29 in.)
Board weight: 1.08 kg(2.38 lb)
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 28.0 (ANC2CXPI), 29.5 (ANC2CXPL)

Equipment
5.4 AND1EG4T - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Electronic

Interface Board
The AND1EG4T board (EG4T for short) is a 4 channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface
board whose functional version is AND1. The AND1EG4T board can be housed in any of slots
3 and 4 in the chassis.
5.4.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EG4T board, there are one indicator and four interfaces.

Figure 5-13 shows the front panel of the AND1EG4T board.
Figure 5-13 Appearance of the front panel
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EG4T board:
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port
l ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port
NOTE
There are four LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator are
present above each FE/GE service interface.
For details on the meaning of the indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Interfaces
On the AND1EG4T board, four interfaces are present. Table 5-24 lists the types and usage of
the interfaces.

Equipment
Table 5-24 Types and usage of interfaces on the AND1EF4T
Interface Interfac Usage Pin Corresponding

on the e Type Cable
Front
Panel
FE/GE0- RJ-45 Input/output For details, see For details,

FE/GE3 interfaces for FE/GE Table 5-25 and see10.5.1 Ethernet
electrical signals Table 5-26. Cables.
Table 5-25 Pins for the FE electrical interface
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
1 Positive of twisted pair cable

1
2 Negative of twisted pair

87654321 cable 1

2

3

cable 3

cable 2

Equipment

4

cable 4

The AND1EG4T provides four FE/GE service interfaces (two groups) and works with the
control board to transmit, receive, and process four FE/GE electrical services.
Table 5-27 lists the functions and features of the AND1EG4T board.
Table 5-27 Functions and features of the AND1EG4T board
Function and Description

Feature
Basic function Provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces.
Interface function Supports signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s.
Supports the traffic control function.
Supports the master/slave port mode.
Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous

Ethernet).

NOTE
When using an electrical interface at 10 Mbit/s, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet clock
or IEEE 1588v2.
On the front panel of the AND1EG4T, the first two FE/GE interfaces are considered as one group and the
other two FE/GE interfaces on the back are considered as another group.
The service access ability of the AND1EG4T is 2 Gbit/s and that of each interface group is 1 Gbit/s. The
two interfaces of each group share the group bandwidth.

Equipment

The AND1EG4T board consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 5-14 shows the functional block diagram of the AND1EG4T board.
Figure 5-14 Functional block diagram of the AND1EG4T board

Backplane
Service signals Service Service signals

4 x FE/GE signals Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Management bus Clock signals
Management Clock signals

Clock module CXP
module
Management bus
CXP
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System power

3.0 V
Power supply supply
Each module on the board 2.5 V
module -48 V/-60 V
1.2 V System power
supply
In the Transmit Direction

When receiving service packets from the control board, the EG4T board sends them to the service
processing module through backplane interfaces. The service processing module identifies the
destination ports for the service packets, buffers and schedules them accordingly. Then the
service packets are sent to the service access module, where coding/decoding, parallel/serial
conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service packets are sent through FE/
GE ports on the front panel.
In the Receive Direction

The AND1EG4T board receives service packets from FE/GE ports on the front panel and sends
them to the service access module, where coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and O/E
conversion are performed. Then the service packets are sent to the service processing module.
When receiving the service packets, the service processing module buffers and schedules them
based on the service access capability of the AND1EG4T board and access bandwidth
configurations at each port. Finally, the service packets are sent out through backplane interfaces.
Service Access Module

l In the receive direction, it receives FE/GE services through FE/GE ports on the front panel,
performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and then sends
the service packets to the service processing module.

Equipment
l In the transmit direction, it receives the service packets from the service processing module,
performs coding/decoding, parallel/serial conversion, and E/O conversion, and then sends
the service packets through FE/GE ports on the front panel.
Service Processing Module

l In the receive direction, it receives and buffers service packets from the interface conversion
module. Then, it schedules the service packets based on the service access capability of the
EG4T board and access bandwidth configurations at each port. Finally, it sends the service
packets through backplane interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, it receives service packets from the control board, identifies the
destination ports for the packets, buffers and schedules them based on the service access
capability of the board and bandwidth configurations at each port. Finally, it sends the
service packets to the service access module.
l It extracts synchronous Ethernet clock signals.
l It extracts and inserts IEEE 1588v2 packets.
Management Module
This module works with the control board to manage and control each module on the board.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EG4T board.
l Supports the IEEE 1588v2 protocol.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the following DC voltages for the modules on the board:
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EG4T board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 5-28 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the AND1EG4T board.

Equipment

Physical Specifications
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (height) x 225.75 (depth) x 193.8 (width)(0.80 in.×8.89 in.×7.63
in.)
Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb)
Power consumption at room temperature (W): 10.0
5.5 AND1EF8T - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Electric Interface

Board
The AND1EF8T (EF8T for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet electric interface board. The
function version of the EF8T is AND1. The EF8T is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.5.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EF8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-15 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EF8T.
Figure 5-15 Font panel of the AND1EF8T
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EF8T:

Equipment
NOTE
There are eight LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicator
are present above each FE service interface.
For details on meanings of indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Interface
Table 5-29 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EF8T.
Table 5-29 Types and usage of interfaces on the AND1EF8T
Interface on Interface Usage Pin Correspondin

the Front Type g Cable
Panel
FE0 - FE7 RJ45 Input/output interfaces For details, see For details, see
for FE electrical signals Table 5-30. 10.5.1
Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE
The FE0 to FE7 interfaces support auto-adaptation to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
Table 5-30 Pins of the RJ45 connector of the AND1EF8T
4 Unspecified
5 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

The AND1EF8T mainly transmits/accesses 8 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services
with the control board.
Table 5-31 lists the functions and features of the AND1EF8T.

Equipment
Table 5-31 Functions and features of the AND1EF8T

Feature
Basic function Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
Interface function Supports signals at 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.

Ethernet).

NOTE
or IEEE 1588v2/IEEE 1588 ACR.

The AND1EF8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module,
clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-16 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EF8T.
Figure 5-16 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EF8T

Backplane
8 x FE electrical Management bus

Access and Service Control CXP
signals bus
convergence driver Service bus
module module CXP
Clock signals
Clock signals
Clock Clock signals
CXP
module
Each module on the board 3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

Power
power supply
1.2 V supply
-48 V/-60 V System
Each module on the board module
power supply

Equipment
Access and Convergence Module

l Transmits and receives 8 x FE electrical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.
l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.
Control Driver Module

l Detects the system status through the management bus.

– Detects any fault of the system control board.
– Detects whether board is loosened from the slot.
– Detects the voltage and temperature.
l Realizes the hot swappable function of the board.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the board.

Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8T.

The technical specifications of the AND1EF8T include the interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 5-32 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the AND1EF8T.
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s.

Equipment

Weight (kg): 0.53(1.17 lb)
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 9.0
5.6 AND1EG2 - 2 Channels GE Optical Interface Board

The AND1EG2 (EG2 for short) is a two channels GE optical interface board. The function
version of the EG2 is AND1. The AND1EG2 is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.6.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EG2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-17 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EG2.
Figure 5-17 Front panel of the AND1EG2
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EG2.
l LINK0 to LINK1 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port
l ACT0 to ACT1 indicators, yellow, which indicate the data transceiving status of the port
Interfaces
Two SFP interfaces are present on the AND1EG2. Table 5-33 list the types and usage of the
interfaces on the AND1EG2.

Equipment
Table 5-33 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the AND1EG2
Interface on the Interf Usage Correspond

Front Panel ace ing Fiber
Type
Optical IN0, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical For details,

module IN1 module is used, this interface is used as an see 10.6
input interface for the GE optical signal. Optical
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical Fibers.
module is used, this interface is not used.
OUT0, LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical

OUT1 module is used, this interface is used as an
output interface for the GE optical signal.
When a single-fiber bidirectional optical
module is used, this interface is used as an
input/output interface for the GE optical
signal.

The AND1EG2 mainly transmits/receives 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the
control board.
Table 5-34 lists the functions and features of the AND1EG2.
Table 5-34 Functions and Features of the AND1EG2
Basic function Provides two GE interfaces (SFP).
Interface function Supports only GE optical modules.

Ethernet).

Equipment

The AND1EG2 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module,
Figure 5-18 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EG2.
Figure 5-18 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EG2

Backplane
Management bus
2 x GE signals Interface Service bus Control CXP
conversion driver Service bus
module module CXP
Clock signals
Clock signals
Clock Clock signals
CXP
module
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

Each module on the board Power power supply
1.2 V supply
-48 V/-60 V System
Each module on the board module
power supply
Interface Conversion Module

l Transmits and receives 2 x GE services.

l Supports SFP interfaces. Select a proper module for single-mode or multi-mode
transmission over a specified distance.
Control Driving Module

l Detects the system status through the management bus.

– Detects any fault of the system control board.
Clock module

Equipment
l Provides the working clock for each module on the AND1EG2.

Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V or 1.2 V power for each module on the AND1EG2.

The technical specifications of the AND1EG2 include the interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable optical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the
AND1EG2 board, see Table 5-35. The interface specifications depend on the optical modules
on the board. For details on the optical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical
Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
CWDM

bidirectional

Equipment
34060539 eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/Rx 1490 nm, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Commercial
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W) (0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.)
Weight (kg): 0.52(1.15 lb)
5.7 AND1EG4F - 4 Channels FE/GE Adaptive Optical

Interface Board
The AND1EG4F (EG4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive optical interface board .
The function version of the EG4F is AND1. The AND1EG4F is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.7.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EG4F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EG4F.
Figure 5-19 Appearance of the front panel of the AND1EG4F
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EG4F:
l L/A0 to L/A3 indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and
data transmit/receive status
For details on indications of the indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.

Equipment
Interfaces
There are four SFP interfaces on the AND1EG4F. Table 5-36 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces.
Table 5-36 Types and usage of interfaces on the AND1EG4F
Interface on the Front Interface Usage Correspo

Panel Type nding
Cable
Optical IN0 to IN3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional For details,

module optical module is used, this see 10.6
interface is used as an input Optical
interface for the FE/GE optical Fibers.
signal.
When a single-fiber bidirectional
optical module is used, this
interface is not used.
OUT0 to LC When a two-fiber bidirectional

OUT3 optical module is used, this
interface is used as an output
interface for the FE/GE optical
signal.
interface is used as an input/output
interface for the FE/GE optical
signal.
Electrical OUT0 IN0, RJ-45 Input/Output interfaces for GE For details,

module OUT3 IN3 electrical signals see 10.5.1
Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE
When the SFP interface functions as an optical interface, it needs to be used with an optical module; when
the SFP interface functions as an electrical interface, it needs to be used with an electrical module.

The AND1EG4F provides four FE/GE service interfaces (two groups). The AND1EG4F is used
with the control board to transmit, receive, and process four channels of FE/GE optical services.
Table 5-37 lists the functions and features of the AND1EG4F.

Equipment
Table 5-37 Functions and features of the AND1EG4F

Feature
Basic function Provides four FE/GE interfaces (SFP).
Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical

modules, GE electrical modules.

Ethernet).

NOTE
On the front panel of the AND1EG4F, the first two FE/GE interfaces are considered as one group and the
other two FE/GE interfaces on the back are considered as another group.
The service access ability of the AND1EG4F is 2 Gbit/s and that of each interface group is 1 Gbit/s. The
two interfaces of each group share the group bandwidth.
If the SFP interface houses an electrical module, the interface does not support synchronous Ethernet or
IEEE 1588v2/IEEE 1588 ACR.

The AND1EG4F consists of the service access module, service processing module, management
module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-20 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1EG4F.
Figure 5-20 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1EG4F
Backplane
Service signals Service Service signals

4 x FE/GE signals Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Management Clock signals

Clock module CXP
module
Management bus
CXP

3.0 V
Power supply supply
Each module on the board 2.5 V
module -48 V/-60 V
1.2 V System power
supply

Equipment
Transmit Direction
The service packets from the control board are sent to the service processing module through
the backplane-side interface of the AND1EG4F. The service processing module identifies the
destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then, the service
processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where coding/
decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O conversion are performed. Finally, the service
access module outputs the packets through the FE/GE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
The FE/GE interfaces on the front panel receive FE/GE service signals. Then, the service access
module performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the
services, and then sends the services to the service processing module. The service processing
module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets based on the service access capability
of the EG4F and the access bandwidth setting at each interface, and finally outputs the packets
through the backplane-side interface.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the FE/GE services from the interfaces on the
front panel, performs O/E conversion, serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and
then sends the services to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets from the service
processing module, performs coding/decoding, serial/parallel conversion, and E/O
conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the FE/GE interfaces on
the front panel.

l In the receive direction, this module receives and buffers the service packets from the
interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces
based on the access capability of the EG4F and the access bandwidth settings at these
interfaces. Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the control board,
identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets
based on the access capability of the EG4F and the access bandwidth setting at each
interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
l This module extracts the synchronous Ethernet clock.
l This module extracts and inserts IEEE 1588 V2 packets.
Management Module
This module is used with the control board to manage and control each module on the EG4F.

Equipment
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EG4F.

l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and SSM protocols.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 protocol.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EG4F.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.2 V

The technical specifications of the AND1EG4F include the interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported by SFP
interfaces on the AND1EG4F board, see Table 5-38, Table 5-39, Table 5-40, Table 5-40, and
Table 5-41. The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board.
For details on the optical/electrical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional

Equipment
34060473 eSFP, 1310 nm, LC, Single-mode, 10 km Commercial

bidirectional
CWDM

bidirectional
Commercial

Equipment
Weight (kg): 0.50 (1.10 lb)
5.8 AND1EF8F - 8 Channels Fast Ethernet Optical Interface

Board
The AND1EF8F (EF8F for short) is an 8 channels Fast Ethernet optical interface board. The
function version of the EF8F is AND1. The AND1EF8F is housed in slot 3 or slot 4.
5.8.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EF8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EF8F.
Figure 5-21 Font panel of the AND1EF8F
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EF8F:
l LINK0 to LINK7 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port
Interfaces
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the AND1EF8F. Table 5-42 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces.

Equipment
Table 5-42 Interfaces of the AND1EF8F
Interface Interface Usage Corresponding

on the Type Fiber
Front
Panel
IN0 - IN7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical For details, see 10.6
module is used, this interface is used as Optical Fibers.
an input interface for the FE optical
signal.
OUT0 - LC When a two-fiber bidirectional optical

OUT7 module is used, this interface is used as
an output interface for the FE optical
signal.
NOTE
The SFP interface should be used with an optical module.
l When a two-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, two LC interfaces are provided on the left and
right sides of the optical module. Each interface uses one fiber, which is used to transmit or receive
service signals.
l When a single-fiber bidirectional optical module is used, only one LC interface is provided on the left
side of the optical module. This optical interface uses only one fiber, which is used to transmit and
receive service signals at the same time.

The AND1EF8F mainly transmits/receives 8 x FE optical signals, and processes the services
with the control board.
Table 5-43 lists the functions and features of the AND1EF8F.
Table 5-43 Functions and features of the AND1EF8F
Basic function Supports eight FE interfaces (SFP).
Interface function Supports FE optical modulesand FE electrical modules.

Ethernet).

Equipment

NOTE
IEEE 1588v2.

The AND1EF8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module,
Figure 5-22 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EF8F.
Figure 5-22 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EF8F

Backplane
Service Management bus

8 x FE optical signals Access and CXP
bus Control driver
convergence Service bus
module CXP
module
Clock signals
Clock signals Clock signals

Clock module CXP

Each module on the board Power supply
1.2 V supply
Each module on the board -48 V/-60 V System power
module
supply
Access and Convergence Module

l Transmits/receives 8 x FE optical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.
l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.
Control Driver Module

l Detects the system status through the management control bus.

Equipment
– Checks whether any fault occurs on the system control board.

Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EF8F.

Power Supply Module

l Accesses two - 48 V DC or - 60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8F.

The technical specifications of the AND1EF8F include the interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported by SFP
interfaces on the AND1EF8F board, see Table 5-44 and Table 5-45. The interface specifications
depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the optical/electrical
modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

Equipment
Weight (kg): 0.55(1.21 lb)
5.9 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical

Interface Board
3 or slot 4.
NOTE
The AND1ML1 and AND1ML1A have the same functions and features except for the matched impedance
(AND1ML1: 75 ohms E1; AND1ML1A: 120 ohms E1).
5.9.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-23 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1ML1.
Figure 5-23 Front panel of the AND1ML1
Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1ML1A.
Figure 5-24 Front panel of the AND1ML1A

Equipment
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A:
Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A. Table
5-46 lists the type and usage of the interface. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see
Table 5-46 Type and usage of the interface on the front panel of the ML1
Interface Interface Usage

on the Type
Front AND1ML1 AND1ML1A
Panel
1 - 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used to 120-ohm interface, which is

transmit or receive the first to used to transmit or receive the
sixteenth channels of E1 services. first to sixteenth channels of
E1 services.
Table 5-47 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5

Equipment
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

The AND1ML1 is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND1ML1A is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND1ML1/ML1A can access a maximum of 16 x E1 signals, supports flexible configuration
of different services on each port, and is hot swappable.
Table 5-48 lists functions and features of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.

Equipment
Table 5-48 Functions and features of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Function and Feature Remarks
Basic function Provides 16 E1 interfaces.
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND1ML1: 75 ohm

interface
AND1ML1A: 120 ohm
Supports the master clock mode (unconfigurable).
Supports the HDB3 line coding (unconfigurable).

ATM Number of supported ATM 16

E1 services
Number of supported IMA 16

groups
Maximum number of E1 16
links in each IMA group
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-

to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Supports the ATM bundle function.
Number of supported PVCs/ 256

PVPs
Number of supported local 32

ATM CCCs
Number of supported remote 64

ATM PWE3s
TDM Supports CES services in CESoPSN and SAToP modes.
Supports the timeslot compression function. For services in

CESoPSN mode, a minimum of 2 timeslots can be bundled
during serial port configuration.
Supports the fractional E1. Different timeslots of an E1 can

be bound to different CES PWs.

Equipment

TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s
PPP Number of supported PPP 16

links
Number of supported ML- 8

PPP groups
Maximum number of links 16

supported by each ML-PPP
group
Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization.

The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A mainly consists of the control module, line-side processing
module, system-side processing module, backplane interface module, clock module, and power
supply module.
Figure 5-25shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.
Figure 5-25 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Backplane
1.2 V -48 V/-60 V

1.26 V -48 V/-60 V
To each module Power supply
2.5 V module
3.3 V 3.3 V
Service Service Service bus

16 x E1 signals Line-side bus System-side bus Backplane Active CXP
processing interface Service bus
module processing module module
Standby CXP
Serial
Management bus
management
bus
Management bus Control module CXP

To each module Clock module CXP

Equipment
In Transmit Direction
The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A first distributes the signals in Ethernet packets from the backplane
to different protocol processing chips according to the service types. The system-side processing
module decapsulates the concatenated services and buffers the services in queues. Then, this
module schedules the egress queues according to the service types, processes and converts the
services, and finally sends the services to the line-side processing module. The line-side
processing module performs coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving for the services,
and finally sends the services to E1 interfaces.
In Receive Direction
The line processing module performs impedance match, signal equalization, signal level
conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding for the accessed E1 signals. Then, the
signals are sent into the system-side processing module, which frames the signals, encapsulates
the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP services in PWE3, and schedules PWs. Finally, this module sends
the signals in Ethernet packets to the backplane interface module.
Line-Side Processing Module

In the receive channel, this module performs impedance match, signal equalization, electrical
level conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding to signals. In the transmit channel,
this module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving to signals.
System-Side Processing Module

This module frames 16 x E1 signals, runs the CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols, and performs
PWE3 encapsulation.
Backplane Interface Module

The service bus receives or transmits service signals.
Control Module
This module controls the reading and writing on the chip, resets the chip, and detects faults in
the chip. When used with the control board, this module controls the board.
Clock Module
This module provides various clock signals for the board to operate normally, detects clocks,
and selects the line recovery clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the -48 V DC/-60 V DC voltage to DC voltages required by each module
on the board.

Equipment
5.9.4 Specifications
The technical specifications of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A include the interface
specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 5-49 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.
Table 5-49 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Interface impedance 75 ohms (AND1ML1)

120 ohms (AND1ML1A)
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output Complies with ITU-T G.703

interface
Attenuation tolerance of the input 0 to 6

interface at the point with a
frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
Anti-interference capability of the Complies with ITU-T G.703

input interface
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823
Weight (kg): 0.56(1.23 lb)
Ambient temperature: –20 ºC to +65 ºC
5.10 AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface

Board
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the AND2ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an
interface on the AND2ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and
features of the AND2ML1A and AND2ML1B are the same.

Equipment
5.10.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Appearances of the Front Panel

Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 show the appearances of the front panel of the AND2ML1A/
AND2ML1B.
Figure 5-26 Front panels of the AND2ML1A
Figure 5-27 Front panels of the AND2ML1B
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B:
Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B. Table
5-50 lists the type and usage of the interfaces. 10.5.4 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables and 10.5.5 120-
Ohm 16 x E1 Cables list the cables corresponding to the interfaces.
Table 5-50 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B

on the Type
Front AND2ML1A AND2ML1B
Panel
0 - 15 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is

to transmit or receive the zero used to transmit or receive the
to fifteenth channels of E1 zero to fifteenth channels of E1
services. services.

Equipment
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13

Equipment
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

AND2ML1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND2ML1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B must be used with the system control board to access and process
16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B can be
flexibly configured, and protocols such as ATM E1, IMA, CES, and ML-PPP are supported.
Table 5-52 lists the functions and features of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B.
Table 5-52 Functions and features of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND2ML1A: 75 ohms

interface
AND2ML1B: 120 ohms
Supports the master/slave clock mode.


E1 services

groups

Equipment


PVPs

ATM CCCs

ATM PWE3s



TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s

links

PPP groups

group

The AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B mainly consists of the service access module, service
processing module, management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-28 shows the functional block diagram of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B.

Equipment
Figure 5-28 Functional block diagram of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B

Backplane
16 x E1 Service signal Service Service signal

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Line clocks Management Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System
3.3V Power
Clock . . power supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System
power supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
Transmit Direction
The service signals from the control board are sent to the service processing module. The service
processing module performs PWE3 decapsulation and PW scheduling for the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, performs
the E1 framing function, and sends the service signals to the service access module. The service
access module performs encoding and line drive for the signals and outputs the signals through
the backplane-side interfaces.
Receive Direction
The board accesses service signals through the backplane-side interfaces, and then the signals
are sent to the service access module. The service access module performs interference isolation,
lightning-proof, impedance matching, level conversion, signal balancing, decoding, and then
sends the processed signals to the service processing module. The service processing module
performs E1 framing, processes service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP
protocols, implements PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends the signals to the
control board through the backplane-side interfaces.

l In the receive direction, this module isolates common mode interference, protects circuits
against transient failures, matches the impedance in the receive direction with the internal
impedance, and performs level conversion, balancing, and decoding for the service signals.
Finally, this module sends the processed signals to the service processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the service
processing module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs the service signals
through the backplane-side interfaces.
l This module recovers the line clock.

Equipment

l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the service access module
and performs E1 framing. This module also identifies protocol types of the service signals,
processes the service signals based on the IMA/ATM, CES, and ML-PPP protocols (for
example, addition and deletion of IMA group members, VP/VC switching and
concatenation of ATM cells, vacant slot compression of CES services, and setup of ML-
PPP groups). Then, this module performs PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, Finally,
this module converts the processed signals to high-rate signals, and then sends the signals
to the control board through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the high-rate signals from the control board
through the backplane-side interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then, this
module performs PWE3 decapsulation, identifies different protocols and processes the
service signals, and completes E1 framing. Finally, this module sends the processed signals
to the service access module.
Management Module
This module manages and controls each module on the board.
Clock Module
l When used with the control board, processes the recovered line clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the input DC voltage into various DC voltages required by each module
on the board.

The technical specifications of the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B include the interface
specifications and physical specifications.
Table 5-53 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B.
Table 5-53 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B
Interface impedance 75 ohms (ML1A)

120 ohms (ML1B)

Equipment
Interface code HDB3
Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703
Attenuation tolerance of the input interface at 0 to 6

the point with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)
Anti-interference capability of the input Complies with ITU-T G.703

interface
Weight (kg): 0.44(0.97 lb)
5.11 AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface

Board
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the AND1MD1A is 75 ohms, and the mapping impedance of
an interface on the AND1MD1B is 120 ohms. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions
and features of the AND1MD1A and AND1MD1B are the same.
5.11.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-29 shows the appearances of the front panel of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B.

Equipment
Figure 5-29 Front panels of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B:
Interfaces
There are two Anea 96 interfaces on the front panel of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B. Table
Table 5-54 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B
Interfac Interfac Usage

e on the e Type
Front AND1MD1A AND1MD1B
Panel
0 to 15 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is used

to transmit or receive the zero to to transmit or receive the zero to
fifteenth channels of E1 fifteenth channels of E1 services.
services.

to transmit or receive the to transmit or receive the
sixteenth to thirty-first channels sixteenth to thirty-first channels
of E1 services. of E1 services.

Equipment
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14

Equipment
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

The AND1MD1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND1MD1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B must be used with the system control board to access and process
32 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B can be
Table 5-56 lists the functions and features of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B.
Table 5-56 Functions and features of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND1MD1A: 75 ohms

interface
AND1MD1B: 120 ohms


E1 services

groups
Maximum number of E1 16a



Equipment

PVPs

ATM CCCs

ATM PWE3s

Supports fractional E1. Different timeslots of an E1 can be

bound to different CES PWs.

TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s

links

PPP groups
Maximum number of links 16b

group

NOTE
a: In the case of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1
ports cannot be bundled to an IMA group.
b: In the case of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1
ports cannot be bundled to an ML-PPP group.

The AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B mainly consists of the service access module, service
Figure 5-30 shows the functional block diagram of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B.

Equipment
Figure 5-30 Functional block diagram of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B

Backplane

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System power

3.3V Power
Clock . . supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System power
supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
Transmit Direction
Receive Direction


Equipment

Management Module
Clock Module
Power Supply Module

on the board.

The technical specifications of the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B include the interface
Table 5-57 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B.
Table 5-57 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B
Interface impedance 75 ohms (MD1A)

120 ohms (MD1B)

Equipment
Interface code HDB3

interface


input interface
Weight (kg): 0.49(1.08 lb)
5.12 AND1MO1C - 8 Channels T1 Interface Board

The AND1MO1C (MO1C for short) is an 8-channel electrical interface board, whose functional
version is AND1. The AND1MO1C can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.12.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1MO1C board, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1MO1C board.
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1MO1C board:

Equipment
For details on the meaning of indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Port Name
Table 5-58 lists the number of interfaces, types, and usage of the interfaces on the AND1MO1C
board.
Table 5-58 Interfaces on the AND1MO1C board
Interfac Interfac Usage Pin Required Cable

e on the e Type
Front
Panel
T1 0-T1 7 RJ-45 Input/output For details, see -

interfaces for T1 Table 5-59.
electrical signals
Table 5-59 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the AND1MO1C board
Front View Pin No. Usage
1 Transmit positive TTip
2 Transmit negative TRing
4 Receive positive RTip
5 Receive negative RRing
6 Unspecified
7 Grounding terminal
8 Grounding terminal

The AND1MO1C board receives 8 x T1 signals and works with the system control board to
process the received signals. The AND1MO1C board supports various service types, including
CES and ML-PPP.
Table 5-60 lists the functions and features of the AND1MO1C board.

Equipment
Table 5-60 Functions and features of the AND1MO1C board

Feature
Basic function Provides eight T1 interfaces.
Interface function Supports the 100 ohm impedance.
Supports the T1 and CT1 modes.
Supports the AMI and B8ZS line coding.
Supports PRBS tests in framed or unframed mode for T1 interfaces

in both the transmit and receive directions.
Supports the TDM and PPP protocols.
Number of supported local TDM 4

CCCs

TDM PWE3s
PPP Number of supported PPP links 8
Number of supported ML-PPP 8

groups

supported by each ML-PPP group

The AND1MO1C board consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power module.
Figure 5-32 shows the functional block diagram of the AND1MO1C board.

Equipment
Figure 5-32 Functional block diagram of the AND1MO1C board

Backplane
8 x T1 Service signal Service Service signal

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System
3.3V Power
Clock 3.3V . power supply
2.5V .
supply
module 1.8V .
-48V/-60V
1.2V module System
1V power supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP

Service signals from the control board are sent to the service processing module. When receiving
the service signals, the service processing module decapsulates and schedules PWs, processes
CES and ML-PPP protocols, frames T1 signals, and then sends the framed T1 signals to the
service access module. The service access module encodes the T1 signals, drives the line, and
outputs the service signals through the interfaces on the front panel.

T1 signals are received through interfaces on the front panel and are sent to the service access
module. When receiving the signals, the service access module isolates the signals from
interference, provides surge protection, matches resistance, converts signal levels, restores clock
data, balances signals, and decodes signals. Finally, the service access module sends the signals
to the service processing module. The service processing module frames T1 signals, processes
the signals according to CES and ML-PPP protocols, performs PWE3 encapsulation, schedules
PWs, and sends the signals to the control board through backplane interfaces.

l In the receive direction, this module isolates signals from common-mode interference,
protects circuit against transient states, matches resistance, converts signal levels, balances
and decodes the signals. Finally, this module sends the signals to the service processing
module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from the service processing
module, encodes the signals, drives the line, and outputs signals through interfaces on the
front panel.
l This module also recovers the line clock.


Equipment
l In the receive direction, this module receives signals from the service access module and
frames E1 signals. Then it identifies the protocol type of the signals and processes the
signals accordingly. For example, if the protocol type is ML-PPP, this module creates an
ML-PPP group. After that, it performs PWE3 encapsulation and schedules PWs. Finally,
this module converts the signals into high-rate signals and sends them to the control board
through backplane interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives high-rate service signals from the control
board through backplane interfaces and recovers low-rate service signals. Then it performs
PWE3 decapsulation, identifies the protocol type, and processes the signals accordingly.
Finally, this module frames T1 signals and sends the signals to the service access module.
Management Module
This module manages and controls other modules on the board.
Clock Module
l Works with the control board to process the recovered line clock signals.
l Provides working clock signals for each module on the board.
Power Supply Module

on the board.

Technical specifications of the AND1MO1C board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 5-61 lists the specifications of interfaces on the AND1MO1C board.
Table 5-61 Specifications of interfaces on the AND1MO1C board
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 1544 kbit/s
Interface impedance 100 ohm
Code B8ZS
Pulse shape at output port Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Anti-interference capability of Compliant with ITU-T G.703

input port
Input jitter tolerance Compliant with ITU-T G.824

Equipment
Item Specification
Output jitter Compliant with ITU-T G.824
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (height) x 225.75 (depth) x 193.8 (width)
Weight (kg): 0.59(1.30 lb)
Power consumption at room temperature (W): 10.6
5.13 AND1AVD8A - 8 Channels ADSL2+ Service Interface

Board
The AND1AVD8A (AVD8A for short) is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1AVD8A can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.13.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1AVD8A, there are indicators and interfaces.
Front Panel
Figure 5-33 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1AVD8A.
Figure 5-33 Front panel of the AND1AVD8A
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1AVD8A.
NOTE
There are eight LINK indicators, which are present above each service interface.
Interfaces
There are eight ADSL2+ interfaces on the front panel of the AND1AVD8A. Table 5-62 lists
types and usage of these interfaces.

Equipment
Table 5-62 Interfaces on the AND1AVD8A
Interface on the Interface Type Usage Cable

Front Panel
DSL0-DSL7 RJ-45 Accesses ADSL2+ For details, see

service signals. 10.5.6 xDSL
Cables.
Table 5-63 lists the pins of DSL1-DSL8 interfaces.
Table 5-63 Pins of DSL0-DSL7 interfaces
Front View Pin Description
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
4 TIP
5 RING
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

The AND1AVD8A is an 8-channel ADSL2+ service interface board. The AND1AVD8A on the
network side must work with the control board to access and process ADSL2+ services. In
addition, the AND1AVD8A supports the ADSL2+ bundling function.
Table 5-64 lists functions and features of the AND1AVD8A.
Table 5-64 Functions and features of the AND1AVD8A
Basic function Provides eight ADSL2+ interfaces.
Used on the NNI side.
Interface function Provides 4 binding groups.

Equipment
Supports the ETHoA-LLC and ETHoA-VCMUX modes.
Supports two xDSL protocol modes: Annex A and Annex M. (The

xDSL protocol mode is unconfigurable. The protocol mode
configured on the DSLAM applies.)
NOTE
The following groups of ADSL2+ ports are present on the board:
l Group 1: port 0 and port 1
The AND1AVD8A board provides insufficient upstream bandwidth and forwards packets with a long
delay, which may affect voice services carried on it. Therefore, it is not recommended to use the
AND1AVD8A board to carry base station voice services.

The AND1AVD8A mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-34 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1AVD8A.
Figure 5-34 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1AVD8A
Backplane
8 x ADSL2+ signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service Access
processing CXP
Module
module
Management bus Management bus
Management
Management bus
module CXP
NTR clock signal

Clock signals
Working clock signals Clock C
module CXP
To each module on the AVD8A
12V
. -48V/-60V
PIU
To each module on the AVD8A . Power supply
. module -48V/-60V
1.2V PIU
Transmit Direction
The control board sends signals to the service processing module through the backplane-side
interfaces. When receiving the service signals, the service processing module encapsulates the
service packets in ETHOA mode, and then sends the packets to the service access module, where

Equipment
encoding and D/A conversion are performed. Finally, the signals are output through the
backplane-side interfaces.
Receive Direction
The service access module accesses ADSL2+ service signals through the backplane-side
interfaces. The service access module performs A/D conversion and decoding on the signals,
and then sends the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module
decapsulates the service packets in ETHOA mode, and then sends the processed packets to the
control board.

l In the receive direction, this module accesses ADSL2+ service signals through the
backplane-side interfaces, performs amplification, filtering, A/D conversion, balancing,
decoding, and verification on the signals, and then sends the signals to the service
processing module.
processing module, performs framing, encoding, D/A conversion, filtering, amplification,
and line driving on the signals, and outputs the signals through the backplane-side
interfaces.
l When the DSLTRUNK attribute of the interfaces on the board is Bundled Group, this
module implements the ADSL link bundling function.
l This module extracts the NTR clock from the ADSL2+ service signals, and then sends the
clock to the clock module.

l In the receive direction, this module receives signals from the service access module,
extracts ATM cells, and rearranges service packets. Then, this module works with the
control board to decapsulate the service packets in ETHOA mode. Finally, this module
outputs the high-rate service packets through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets accessed through the
backplane-side interfaces, performs AAL5 SAR on the service packets, and encapsulates
the service packets into ATM cells. In this manner, this module encapsulates the service
packets in ETHOA mode when working with the control board. Finally, this module outputs
the service packets to the service access module.
l This module controls the committed access rate (CAR).
Management Module
When used with the system control board, this module manages and controls each module on
the AND1AVD8A.
Clock Module

Equipment
l Receives the NTR clock from the service access module, and processes the clock when
used with the control board.
l Provides the working clock to each module on the AND1AVD8A.
Power Supply Module

l Provides the working power for each module on the AVD8A.

The technical specifications of the AND1AVD8A include performance specifications,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 5-65 lists the performance specifications of the AND1AVD8A.
Table 5-65 Specifications of the ADSL2+ interfaces

Interface Max. Uplink Rate Max. Downlink Rate Max.
Transmission
Distance
ADSL2+ 2.5 Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 6.5 km
Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb)
Power consumption at room temperature (W):19.6 W
5.14 AND1AVD8B - 8 Channels VDSL2 Service Interface

Board
The AND1AVD8B (AVD8B for short) is an 8-channel VDSL2 (compatible with ADSL2+)
service interface board, whose functional version is AND1. The AND1AVD8B can be housed
in slot 3 or 4.
5.14.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1AVD8B, there are indicators and interfaces.
Front Panel
Figure 5-35 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1AVD8B.
Figure 5-35 Front panel of the AND1AVD8B

Equipment
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1AVD8B.
NOTE
There are eight LINK indicators, which are present above each service interface.
Interfaces
There are eight ADSL2+/VDSL2 interfaces on the front panel of the AND1AVD8B. Table
5-66 lists types and usage of these interfaces.
Table 5-66 Interfaces on the AND1AVD8B
Interface on the Interface Type Usage Cable

Front Panel
DSL0-DSL7 RJ-45 Accesses ADSL2+/ For details, see

VDSL2 service 10.5.6 xDSL
signals. Cables.
Table 5-67 lists the pins of DSL1-DSL8 interfaces.
Table 5-67 Pins of DSL0-DSL7 interfaces
Front View Pin Description
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
4 TIP
5 RING
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

The AND1AVD8B is an 8-channel ADSL2+/VDSL2 service interface board. The
AND1AVD8B on the network side must work with the control board to access and process

Equipment
ADSL2+/VDSL2 services. In addition, the AND1AVD8B supports the ADSL2+/VDSL2

bundling function.
Table 5-68 lists functions and features of the AND1AVD8B.
Table 5-68 Functions and features of the AND1AVD8B

Basic function Provides eight ADSL2+/VDSL2 interfaces.
Interface function Provides 4 binding groups.
Supports Vectoring.
Supports Annex B protocol mode.

NOTE
The following groups of ADSL2+/VDSL2 ports are present on the board:

The AND1AVD8B mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
Figure 5-36 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1AVD8B.
Figure 5-36 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1AVD8B
Backplane
8 x VDSL2 signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service Access
processing CXP
Module
module
Management bus Management bus
Management
Management bus
module CXP
Clock signals
Working clock signals Clock C
module CXP
To each module on the AVD8B
12V
. -48V/-60V
PIU
To each module on the AVD8B . Power supply
. module -48V/-60V
1.2V PIU

Equipment
Transmit Direction
The control board sends signals to the service processing module through the backplane-side
interfaces. When receiving the service signals, the service processing module encapsulates the
service packets, and then sends the packets to the service access module, where encoding and
D/A conversion are performed. Finally, the signals are output through the backplane-side
interfaces.
Receive Direction
The service access module accesses ADSL2+/VDSL2 service signals through the backplane-
side interfaces. The service access module performs A/D conversion and decoding on the signals,
and then sends the signals to the service processing module. The service processing module
decapsulates the service packets, and then sends the processed packets to the control board.

l In the receive direction, this module accesses ADSL2+/VDSL2 service signals through the
backplane-side interfaces, performs amplification, filtering, A/D conversion, balancing,
decoding, and verification on the signals, and then sends the signals to the service
processing module.
processing module, performs framing, encoding, D/A conversion, filtering, amplification,
and line driving on the signals, and outputs the signals through the backplane-side
interfaces.

l In the receive direction, this module receives signals from the service access module,
extracts ATM/PTM cells, and rearranges service packets. Then, this module works with
the control board to decapsulate the service packets. Finally, this module outputs the high-
rate service packets through the backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service packets accessed through the
backplane-side interfaces, and encapsulates the service packets into ATM/PTM cells. In
this manner, this module encapsulates the service packets when working with the control
board. Finally, this module outputs the service packets to the service access module.
Management Module
When used with the system control board, this module manages and controls each module on
the AND1AVD8B.
Clock Module

Equipment
l Receives the NTR clock from the service access module, and processes the clock when
used with the control board.
l Provides the working clock to each module on the AND1AVD8B.
Power Supply Module


l Provides the working power for each module on the AVD8B.

The technical specifications of the AND1AVD8B include performance specifications,
Table 5-69 lists the performance specifications of the AND1AVD8B.
Table 5-69 Specifications of the VDSL2 interfaces

Transmission
Distance
VDSL2 50 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 3.5 km
Weight (kg): 0.50(1.10 lb)
Power consumption at room temperature (W):19.6 W
5.15 AND1SHD4 - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Service Interface

Board
The AND1SHD4 (SHD4 for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1SHD4 can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.15.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1SHD4, there are indicators, and interfaces.

Figure 5-37 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1SHD4.

Equipment
Figure 5-37 Appearance of the front panel of the AND1SHD4
Indicators
l LINK0/LINK1/LINK2/LINK3 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status.
Interfaces
Table 5-70 lists the types of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4 and their respective usage.
Table 5-70 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4
Interface Interface Usage Corresponding

on the Type Cable
Front Panel
SHDSL0 - RJ-11 Accesses the first 4 x G.SHDSL For details, see 10.5.6
SHDSL3 services. xDSL Cables.
Table 5-71 lists the pins of theSHDSL0 - SHDSL3 interfaces.
Table 5-71 Pins of the SHDSL0 - SHDSL3 interfaces on the AND1SHD4
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 TIP
4 RING
6543 21
5 Unspecified
6 Unspecified

Used with the control board, the AND1SHD4 can process the G.991.2 single-pair high-speed
digital subscriber line (G.SHDSL) service.

Equipment
Table 5-72 lists the functions and features of the AND1SHD4.
Table 5-72 Functions and features of the AND1SHD4
Basic function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces.
Interface function Supports one binding group.
Supports the ATM mode and the EFM mode.
Supports the extended attributes compliant with the ITU-T G.

992.1.bis in ATM mode.
Supports the NTR clock.

NOTE
The AND1SHD4 supports one binding group.
l When the AND1SHD4 is in ATM mode, interface binding needs to be manually configured.
l When the AND1SHD4 is in EFM mode, the ATN device automatically adapts to the interface binding
configuration on the DSLAM.

The AND1SHD4 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module,
Figure 5-38 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1SHD4.
Figure 5-38 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1SHD4
Backplane
Clock signals
Each module Clock signals
Clock module CXP
of the board
Service
Parallel/serial
Signal bus
Service bus converting CXP
4 x G.SHDSL voltage Service module
and encapsulation Logic
signals
performs and bundling Management control Serial management bus
bus unit CXP
protection module
module Status signal
CXP
Interface converting and control
Service access module
module
1.2 V -48V/-60V System power

To each Power supply supply
1.5 V
module module -48V/-60V
3.3 V System power
supply

Equipment

The control board sends the service signals to the parallel/serial converting module and then to
the logic control unit, which processes the service signals. Finally, the service encapsulation and
bundling module decapsulates the service signals and outputs the G.SHDSL service.

The service board accesses the G.SHDSL signals and the service access module transforms the
signal voltage and performs protection for the signals. Then, the service encapsulation and
bundling module encapsulates and bundles the signals, adjusts the signal rate, frames the signals,
and then sends the signals to the logic control module, which processes the service signals.
Finally, the parallel/serial converting module converts and sends the service signals to the control
board.

l The service access module transforms the signal voltage and performs protection for the
access signals. Then, the service encapsulation and bundling module bundles four channels
of G.SHDSL signals, strips the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer, and finally outputs the service
signals.
l The interface converting and control module sends the service to the service encapsulation
and bundling module, which then performs ATM AAL5 adaptation and encapsulation, and
finally outputs the G.SHDSL service.
Interface Converting and Control Module

This module performs parallel/serial conversion for transporting the service between the system
control board and the local board.
The system control board controls and manages the board through the serial management bus.
In addition, the logic control unit detects alarms and reports them to the control board through
the serial management bus.
Clock Module
The clock module provides working clock for each module on the AND1SHD4.
Power Supply Module

This module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.

The technical specifications of the AND1SHD4 cover the performance specifications, board
Table 5-73 lists the performance specifications of the AND1SHD4.

Equipment
Table 5-73 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4
Interface Max. Max. Max. Four-Line Max.

Upstream Downstream Bundling Rate Transmission
Rate Rate Distance
G.SHDSL 5.7 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 23 Mbit/s 5.25 km
Weight (kg): 0.60(1.32 lb)
5.16 AND1SHD4I - 4 Channels G.SHDSL Interface Board

for IMA Mode
The AND1SHD4I (SHD4I for short) is a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, whose
functional version is AND1. The AND1SHD4I can be housed in slot3, slot4.
5.16.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1SHD4I, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 5-39 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1SHD4I.
Figure 5-39 Appearance of the front panel of the AND1SHD4I
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1SHD4I:
l LINK0, LINK1, LINK2 and LINK3 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection
status.
Interface
Table 5-74 lists the types of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4I and their respective usage.

Equipment
Table 5-74 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4I
Interface on the Interface Usage Corresponding

Front Panel Type Cable
SHDSL0- RJ-11 Input and output G.SHDSL For details, see 10.5.6
SHDSL3 signals. xDSL Cables.
Table 5-75 lists the pins of the SHDSL1-SHDSL4 interfaces.
Table 5-75 Pins of the SHDSL0 - SHDSL3 interfaces on the AND1SHD4I
1 Unspecified
2 Unspecified
3 TIP
4 RING
6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Unspecified
6 Unspecified

The AND1SHD4I can access four channels of G.SHDSL signals encapsulated in the IMA format
when it is used with the control board.
Table 5-76 lists the functions and features of the AND1SHD4I.
Table 5-76 Functions and features of the AND1SHD4I

Feature
Basic Function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces.
Interface function Supports one binding group.
Supports the IMA mode.
Supports the NTR clock.

Equipment

Feature
NOTE
The IMA binding group of the AND1SHD4I has a fixed number of member links, that is, 4. No manual
configuration is required.
The AND1SHD4I supports one IMA binding group, but two VE interfaces can be created for the active
and standby service trails to protect services.

The AND1SHD4I mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting and control
module, IMA processing module, clock module, and power supply module.
Figure 5-40 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1SHD4I.
Figure 5-40 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1SHD4I
Management and Backplane
control bus
Service signals
IMA processing IMA service signals CXP
module ATM cells
Serial
Interface management bus
converting and CXP
control module
4 x G.SHDSL signals Service access IMA service signals
Status signal bus
module Management CXP
and control bus
4 x NTR clock signals

Clock signals
Working clock signals Clock module CXP
To each module on the SHD4I
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V System

1.8 V power supply
1.5 V
on the SHD4I module -48 V/-60 V System
1.2 V
power supply

The RJ-11 interfaces access the G.SHDSL signals to the service access module. Then, the service
access module works with the IMA processing module to multiplexes the service signals, and
sends the ATM cells to the interface converting and control module. The interface converting
and control module decapsulates the ATM frames, converts the parallel signals to serial signals,
converges the serial signals to one channel service signal, and finally sends the service signal to
the backplane.

The interface converting and control module receives the service signal from the backplane,
converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the signals in the ATM frame format,
and then sends the ATM frames to the service access module. The service access module

Equipment
processes the ATM cells and work with the IMA processing module to inversely multiplex the
ATM signals as IMA signals. Finally, the service access module sends the packets to the
G.SHDSL interfaces.

This module accesses the service packets in different modes according to the encapsulation mode
of the G.SHDSL interfaces. In addition, this module has the thunder protection function.
l In the receive direction, this module converts the serial packets to parallel packets, and
sends the parallel packets to the interface converting and control module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interface
converting and control module, converts the serial IMA service signals to parallel IMA
service signals, and finally sends the parallel IMA service signals to the G.SHDSL
interfaces.
l In addition, this module extracts the NTR clock signals from the G.SHDSL service signals
received and sends the clock signals to the clock module.
Interface Converting and Control Module

This module converges the G.SHDSL service signals to one channel service signal and works
with the control board to manage and control the SHD4I.
l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the service
access module, converts the IMA service signals, and sends the service signals to the IMA
processing module, which multiplexes the service signals. Then, this module receives the
ATM cells from the IMA processing module, decapsulates the ATM frames, converts the
parallel signals to serial signals, converges the signals to one channel service signal, and
finally sends the service signal to the backplane.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signal from the backplane,
converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the service signal into ATM
frames, and sends the ATM cells to the IMA processing module, which inversely
multiplexes the ATM signals. Then, this module receives IMA signals from the IMA
processing module and finally sends the IMA signals to the service access module.
l In addition, this module works with the control board to manage and control each module
on the AND1SHD4I.
IMA Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interface
converting and control module, multiplexes the service signals as ATM signals, and finally
sends the ATM signals to the interface converting and control module, which converges
the signals.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the backplane after
the interface converting and control module processes the service signals. Then, this module
inversely multiplexes the ATM signals and sends the IMA service signals to the interface
converting and control module.

Equipment
Clock Module
l Selects a clock source from the four channels of NTR clock signals and uploads the clock
signals to the control board.
l Provides working clock signals for each module on the SHD4I board.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the following DC voltages for the modules on the AND1SHD4I board:
l 3.3 V
l 1.8 V
l 1.5 V
l 1.2 V

The technical specifications of the AND1SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board
Table 5-77 lists the specifications of the interfaces of the AND1SHD4I.
Table 5-77 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4I
Interface Max. Max. Max. Rate of Max.

Upstream Rate Downstream Four Bundled Transmission
(Mbit/s) Rate (Mbit/s) Interfaces Distance (km)
(Mbit/s)
G.SHDSL 2.3 2.3 9.2 5.25
Board weight (kg): 0.60(1.32 lb)
5.17 TNC1PIU - Power Interface Board

The TNC1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is
TNC1. The PIU is housed in slot 5.
5.17.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, power supply interfaces, and a label.

Equipment

Figure 5-41 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 5-41 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU
Indicators
The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU.
PWRA/PWRB, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWRA/PWRB is on and
green, it indicates that power is accessed.
Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 5-78 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU
and their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 10.1 Power Supply
Cables and Ground Cables.
Table 5-78 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface on the Front Panel Usage
NEG1(-) -48 V power input interface
RTN1(+) BGND power input interface
NEG2(-) -48 V power input interface
RTN2(+) BGND power input interface
Label
Operation warning label: indicates the following precautions , which should be taken for removal
or insertion of the PIU board.

Equipment
NOTICE
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
make sure that these power supplies are disabled.
Do not remove or insert the board with power on.

The PIU, a power interface board, supports the functions and features such as power access,
power protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting.
Table 5-79 lists functions and features of the PIU.
Table 5-79 Functions and features of the PIU

Power access PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the
equipment.
Power protection The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short
circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking
board and components on it.
Surge protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an
alarm if the protection fails.
Power backup The two DC power supplies back up each other.

The PIU mainly consists of the surge protection and failure detection module, communication
unit module, and board in-position module.
Figure 5-42 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU.
Figure 5-42 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Backplane
Each board
-48 V/-60 V Surge protection and failure
detection module
Surge protection failure

-48 V/-60 V Each board
Surge protection and failure alarm signals
detection module
Surge protection failure
alarm signals Inter-board
CXP
communication bus
Communication
Board in-position
CXP
signals
Board in-position module

Equipment
Surge Protection and Failure Detection Module

This module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightning
circuit. If the surge protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the control board.
Communication Unit Module

This module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB version
information, and alarm signals about the surge protection failure.
Board In-Position Module

This module reports the board in-position signals to the control board.

The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,
and input voltage.
Table 5-80 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 5-80 Technical specifications of the PIU
Item Technical Specification
Board dimensions (mm) 41.4 (H) x 224.8 (D) x 21.0 (W)
Weight (kg) 0.12
Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5
Input voltage (V) -38.4 to -72.0
5.18 ANC1FAN - Fan Board

The ANC1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is ANC1.
5.18.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

Figure 5-43 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Equipment
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN:
ANC1FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans.
ESD Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body.
Handle
The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board
replacement.
Label
The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.

The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.
The functions and features of the FAN are as follows:
l Accesses one 12 V power supply for driving three fans.

l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against overcurrent.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the
system.
l Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version
number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.

Equipment

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay module, communication unit module, intelligent fan
speed adjustment module, and board in-position module.
Figure 5-44 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.
Figure 5-44 Block diagram for the working principle of the ANC1FAN
Fans x 3
12 V Backplane
12 V 12V
Start-delay module
CXP
12 V 12 V power shut signals

Inter-board
Communication unit communication bus
module CXP
Fan-speed signals
Fan-speed
reporting module CXP
PWM signals PWM driver

module CXP
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment module
Fan in-position
Board in-position signals
module CXP
Start-delay Module
This module has the function of provides start-delay to the power supply for fans and protects
fans against overcurrent.

This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environment
temperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the start-
delay module.
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module

This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the control board and adjusts
the fan rotating speed according to the pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from
the control board.

Equipment


The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 5-81 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 5-81 Technical specifications of the FAN
Weight (kg) 0.20
Power consumption (W) l Low rate: 2.3

l Medium rate: 6.1
l High rate: 17
Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power
5.19 Filler Panel

5.19.1 Appearance and Valid Slots

There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.
Appearance
Figure 5-45 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 5-45 Appearance of a filler panel
Valid Slots
A filler panel can be housed in any of slots 3-4 of a chassis.

Equipment

A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,
and ensure proper ventilation.
Main functions of a filler panel are as follows:
l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of
electromagnetic radiation.
l Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis.
l Prevents internal voltage from being exposed.
l Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis.

Equipment
Hardware Description 6 ATN 910I Boards
6 ATN 910I Boards
ATN 910I has integrated with boards that are not swappable.

Equipment
Hardware Description 7 ATN 910B Boards
7 ATN 910B Boards
ATN 910B has integrated with boards that are not swappable.

Equipment
8 ATN 950B Boards
About This Chapter
Boards on ATN 950B are used together to provide various functions.
8.1 Board Overview


8.3 AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process

Unit
The AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB (CXPA/CXPB for short) is a control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPA/CXPB is AND1. The CXPA/
CXPB is housed in slot 7 or slot 8.
8.4 AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE - System Control, Cross-connect, and Multi-protocol Process

Unit
The AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE (CXPB/CXPE for short) is a control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPB/CXPE is AND2. The CXPB/
CXPE is housed in slot 7 or slot 8.
8.5 AND1EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface Board

The AND1EM4T (EM4T for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board.
The function version of the EM4T is AND1. The AND1EM4T is housed in any of slots 1 to 4
(when working with the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working
with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.6 AND1EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board

The AND1EM8T (EM8T for short) is an eight channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface
board. The function version of the EM8T is AND1. The AND1EM8T is housed in any of slots
1 to 2.
8.7 AND1EM4F - 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board

The AND1EM4F (EM4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE optical interface board. The
function version of the EM4F is AND1. The AND1EM4F is housed in any of slots 1 to 4 (when

Equipment
working with the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the
AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.8 AND1EM4C: 4 Channels GE/FE Combo Board

The AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board is a 4 x FE/GE Combo board and its functional version
is AND1. The AND1EM4C is housed in any of slots 1 to 4 (when working with the AND1CXPA/
AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).

The AND1EM8F (EM8F for short) is an eight channels FE/GE optical interface board. The
function version of the EM8F is AND1. The AND1EM8F is housed in any of slots 1 to 2.
8.10 AND1EX1 - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board

The AND1EX1 (EX1 for short) is a one channel 10 GE optical interface board. The function
version of the EX1 is AND1. The AND1EX1 is housed in any of slots 5 to 6 (when working
with the AND1CXPA), in any of slots 3 to 6 (when working with the AND1CXPB), and in any
of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.11 AND2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS Optical Interface Board

This section describes the AND2CQ1B, a 4 channels channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS optical
interface board, in terms of the overview, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and
technical specifications.
8.12 AND2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical Interface Board

The AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board is a 4 x OC-3/STM-1 POS optical interface board and its
functional version is AND2. It is configured in any of slots 1 to 6 in a chassis.
8.13 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board

3 or slot 4.
8.14 AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface Board

in slots 1 to 6.
8.15 AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface Board

in slots 1 to 6.
8.16 TND1PIU - Power Interface Board

The TND1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is
TND1. The PIU is housed in slot 9 or slot 10.
8.17 AND1FAN - Fan Board

The AND1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is AND1.
8.18 Filler Panel


Equipment
8.1 Board Overview

Board Structure
Figure 8-1 shows the structure of a board (using the AND1EM4F board as an example).
Figure 8-1 Board structure
A board mainly consists of the following parts:

l PCB
The PCB houses various functional chips of the board and is the most important part of the
board. Through the front panel, the PCB provides indicators, buttons, and ports.
NOTE
Different boards provide different indicators, buttons, and ports; not all boards support a daughter
board. For details, see the description of each board.
l Front panel, including the captive screws, ejector levers, indicators, buttons, and interfaces.
– Captive screws: secure the board in the subrack.
– Ejector levers: used for inserting or removing the board. Bar codes are also attached on
the ejector levers.
NOTE
The ejector lever on the left side of the front panel of a board is attached with a label marking the bar code
of the board (for a control board, the bar code label is above the ejector level on the front panel). The bar
code of a control board will be retrieved by ATN 950B as the equipment serial number (ESN).
The ESN is used for applying for a license. ATN 950B automatically reads the bar code of the backplane
or control board as the device ESN. Generally, the bar code of the backplane takes precedence over that
of the control board.
Board Naming
NOTE
The preceding only describes how to roughly identify a board. For details on board specifications, see board
descriptions.

Equipment
A board name mainly consists of the board functional version and short name. A short name can
roughly identify a board. The short name of a control board, power board, and fan board is CXPx,
PIU, and FAN respectively. The following mainly describes how to quickly identify a physical
interface board through the short name of a board.
As shown in Figure 8-2, the short name of a board consists of an abbreviated board name and
an extended name. An abbreviated board name includes the board type, interface quantity, and
interface rate. When boards have the same abbreviated board name, they can be differentiated
using extended names. An extended name does not have special meanings and can be omitted.
Figure 8-2 Board short name (using ML1A as an example)
ML1A
Extended name
Interface rate
Interface quantity
Board type
The following describes each part of an abbreviated board name:
l Board type M indicates an E-carrier interface board. The interface quantity is represented
using L or D, indicating 16 or 32 respectively. The interface rate is represented using 1,
indicating E1.
l Board type C indicates a CPOS interface board. The interface quantity is represented using
Q, indicating 4. The interface rate is represented using 1, indicating STM-1.
l Board type P indicates a POS interface board. The interface quantity is represented using
Q, indicating 4. The interface rate is represented using 1, indicating STM-1.
l Board type E indicates an Ethernet interface board. The interface quality is represented
using an Arabic numeral. The interface rate is represented using M or X, indicating FE/GE
or 10GE respectively. Extended name F or T is used to indicate an optical interface or
electrical interface respectively.
NOTE
For the name of an Ethernet interface board, the interface rate and quantity rate are in an order opposite
to those for the names of other boards. For example, in EM4F (a name of an Ethernet interface board),
interface rate M comes before interface quantity 4.
Board Relationship
A control board mainly implements system control and service grooming, and receives and
processes various services by working with physical interface boards. A power board provides
power inputs for the system. A fan board blows air to dissipate heat generated during system
operation. Figure 8-3 shows the board relationship.

Equipment
Figure 8-3 Board relationship
Control and
User side management module Network side
Clock module
FE/GE FE/GE
EM4F/EM4T EM4F/EM4T
FE/GE FE/GE
EM8F/EM8T EM8F/EM8T
10GE 10GE
EX1 EX1
E1 Service E1
ML1/ML1A/ML1B ML1/ML1A/ML1B
processing and
E1 switching module E1
MD1A/MD1B MD1A/MD1B
CPOS CPOS
STM-1 STM-1
CQ1B CQ1B
POS POS
STM-1 STM-1
PQ1 PQ1
Control board
CXPA/CXPB/CXPE
Power interface board Fan board

PIU FAN
ATN 950B is equipped with active and standby control boards, which form a hot backup. A dual
feeding and selective receiving mechanism is used for service interaction between physical
interface boards and the two control boards.

8.2.1 Board Type

Boards are the key hardware components of the equipment. Boards on the ATN 950B are
classified into the following types: control board (CXP), physical interface card (PIC), power
interface board (PIU), and fan board (FAN).
Control Board (CXP)

The control board controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and provides
auxiliary interfaces.

Equipment
Table 8-1 Control boards supported by the ATN 950B
AND1CXPA System control, switching and timing board V200R001C02
AND1CXPB System control, switching and timing board V200R001C02
AND2CXPB System control, switching and timing board V200R003C00
AND2CXPE System control, switching and timing board V200R003C00
Physical Interface Card (PIC)

The physical interface boards process the services with the control board.
The physical interface boards are classified into the following types based on the service access
mode: Ethernet service interface boards, E1 service interface boards, STM-1 service
interface boards.
Table 8-2 Ethernet service interface boards supported by the ATN 950B
AND1EM4T 4 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board V200R001C02
AND1EM8T 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board V200R001C02
AND1EM4F 4 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board V200R001C02
AND1EM8F 8 Channels GE/FE Optical Interface Board V200R001C02
AND1EM4C 4 Channels GE/FE Combo Board V200R002C01
AND1EX1 1 Channel 10GE Optical Interface Board V200R001C02
Table 8-3 E1 service interface boards Supported by the ATN 950B and Valid Slots
AND1ML1 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(75 ohm)
AND1ML1A 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(120 ohm)
AND3ML1A 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(75 ohm)
AND3ML1B 16 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(120 ohm)

Equipment
AND2MD1A 32 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(75 ohm)
AND2MD1B 32 Channels E1 Electrical Interface Board V200R001C02

(120 ohm)
Table 8-4 STM-1 service interface boards supported by the ATN 950B
AND2CQ1B 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c V200R002C00

POS Optical Interface Board
AND2PQ1 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical V200R002C01

Interface Board
Power Board
Power boards lead in power for supplying power to the device. For details about power
distribution, see Power Distribution.
Table 8-5 Power boards supported by the ATN 950B
TND1PIU Power interface board V200R001C02
Fan Board (FAN)

The fan board exhausts hot air for heat dissipation. For details about air duct, see Heat
Dissipation.
Table 8-6 Fan boards supported by the ATN 950B
AND1FAN Fan board V200R001C02
8.2.2 Ethernet Service Interface Board

The ATN 950B supports multiple types of Ethernet interface boards to address requirements for
various interface quantities, interface rates, and interface types (optical/electrical).
Ethernet service interface boards are widely used in various network environments. They can
accept base station services on the user side, and transmit services upstream on the network side.

Equipment
The Ethernet service interface board supports Layer 2 services, Layer 3 services, and hybrid
transmission of Layer 2 and Layer 3 services. (When the main interface is in Layer 2 mode,
configure the sub-interface to transmit Layer 2/Layer 3 services.)
Table 8-7 shows the Ethernet service interface boards supported by the ATN 950B and the
Table 8-7 Ethernet service interface boards
Board Interface Description
AND1EM4T 4 x FE/GE electrical interface
AND1EM8T 8 x FE/GE electrical interface
AND1EM4F 4 x FE/GE SFP interface
AND1EM8F 8 x FE/GE SFP interface
AND1EX1 1 x 10 GE XFP interface

NOTE
Ethernet service interface boards have similar service functions, but differ in the interface quantity and
interface type.
l FE/GE electrical interfaces support signals at 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s.
l FE/GE SFP interfaces support GE optical modules, GE electrical modules, FE optical modules, and
FE electrical modules.
l 10GE XFP interfaces support 10GE optical modules.
8.2.3 E1 Service Interface Board

The E1 service interface board supports ATM, PPP, and TDM link-layer protocols.
ATM
Figure 8-4 shows the application of the E1 service interface board using the ATM protocol.
Figure 8-4 Application of the E1 service interface board using the ATM protocol
An ATN device uses the E1 service interface board on the user side to support ATM over E1.
When the ATM service access rate is between E1 and E3, multiple E1 links are bound into an
IMA group to increase service bandwidth. On the network side, the E1 service interface board
implements ATM service emulation and transparently transmits the ATM services over the

Equipment
packet switched network (PSN), such as MPLS or Ethernet. For detailed information, see the
chapter "ATM IMA application" in the Feature Description.
PPP
Figure 8-5 shows the application of the E1 service interface board using the PPP protocol.
Figure 8-5 Application of the E1 service interface board using the PPP protocol (user side)
The ATN device uses the E1 service interface board to support IP services carried over ML-
PPPs on user side.
NOTE
An independent PPP link cannot carry service. PPP links must be added to an ML-PPP group to carry
services.
An ML-PPP does not support MPLS services.
TDM
Figure 8-6 shows the application of the E1 service interface board using the TDM protocol.
Figure 8-6 Application of the E1 service interface board using the TDM protocol
The ATN device uses the E1 service interface board to access the TDM service, encapsulate the
service signals into packets, and transparently transmit the packets through PWs over the PSN
network. This achieves CES service emulation. For detailed information, see the chapter "CES
application" in the Feature Description.
Comparison Between E1 Service Interface Boards

Table 8-8 shows the E1 service interface boards supported by the ATN 950B and the differences
between the boards.

Equipment
Table 8-8 E1 service interface boards
Function AND1ML1 AND2ML1A AND1MD1A

Interface type E1 E1 E1
Number of 16 16 32
interfaces
Interface AND1ML1: 75 ohm AND2ML1A: 75 ohm AND1MD1A: 75 ohm

impedance AND1ML1A: 120 ohm AND2ML1B: 120 ohm AND1MD1B: 120 ohm
Interface clock Master clock mode Master/slave clock mode Master/slave clock mode
mode
Link-layer ATM, PPP, TDM ATM, PPP, TDM ATM, PPP, TDM
protocols
Minimum 2 1 1
number of
timeslots in CE1
mode
8.2.4 STM-1 Service Interface Board

ATN devices support STM-1 POS interfaces and CPOS interfaces. A POS interface directly
maps data packets of variable length into SONET payload and uses the SONET physical-layer
transmission standard. A CPOS interface is a channelized POS interface.
Figure 8-7 and Figure 8-8 show the applications of STM-1 service interface boards on a
network.
Figure 8-7 Application of the STM-1 service interface board (user side)
Node B
POS/CPOS STM-1
CXP PIC
MSTP Board
ATN CX600 RNC
Node B

Equipment
Figure 8-8 Application of the STM-1 service interface board (network side)
STM-1 POS/CPOS
PIC CXP
Board
Node B ATN CX600 CX600 RNC
The AND2CQ1B on the ATN 950B is used as the STM-1 service interface board, which provides
four CPOS interfaces. Each CPOS interface supports 63 E1 channels. The supported services
are almost the same as those of the E1 service interface board.
On ATN 950B, AND2PQ1 and AND2CQ1B are the interface boards that support STM-1
services. The AND2PQ1 board provides 4 POS interfaces. It uses the SONET as the physical-
layer protocol and PPP to control links at the data link layer. The AND2PQ1 board runs IP
services at the network layer. The AND2CQ1B board provides 4 CPOS interfaces. The CPOS
physical ports are no longer used as service ports, but the channelized 63 E1 channels are used
as synchronization serial ports that support the same services as an E1 service interface board.
l The AND2PQ1 board can be used on the user or network side. It carries IP services over
POS interfaces.
l The AND2CQ1B board can be used on the user or network side. It supports ML-PPP and
carries IP services over E1 channels on CPOS interfaces.
l The AND2CQ1B board on the user side can access and converge ATM and TDM services
over E1 channels on CPOS interfaces. It implements service emulation and transparent
transmission over a packet switched network, achieving ATM PWE3 and TDM PWE3
(CES) services.
NOTE
Services supported by the E1 channel on the CPOS interface are basically the same as those provided by
the E1 service interface board. The differences are listed as follows:
l The E1 channel of the AND2CQ1B supports IP and MPLS services carried over ML-PPPs; the E1
service interface board only supports IP services.
l The E1 channel of the AND2CQ1B does not support fractional E1; the E1 service interface board
supports fractional E1 when the TDM protocol is used.
8.3 AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB - System Control, Cross-

The AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB (CXPA/CXPB for short) is a control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPA/CXPB is AND1. The CXPA/
CXPB is housed in slot 7 or slot 8.
Table 8-9 provides comparison between AND1CXPA and AND1CXPB.

Equipment
Table 8-9 Board comparison
Board Type Cross-Connect Capacity 1588 ACR
AND1CXPA 44 Gbit/s Supported
AND1CXPB 56 Gbit/s Supported
8.3.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB, there are indicators, buttons, switch for
the ejector lever, and interfaces.

Figure 8-9 and Figure 8-10 show the appearance of the front panel of the AND1CXPA/
AND1CXPB.
Figure 8-9 Front panel of the AND1CXPA
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the AND1CXPB
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB:
l ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status
l ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board
Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB:

Equipment
l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use.

l RRST button, which is used for reset on the board. When you press the RST button and
then release it, the board is reset.
l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, all
the board indicators on the NE are on.
Switch for the Ejector Lever

On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To remove
a board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.
Interface
Table 8-10 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
Table 8-10 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB
Interface Interface Usage Pin Correspondi

on the Type ng Cable
Front
Panel
ETH/ RJ45 10M/100M auto-sensing Refer to Table Refer to 10.2

OAM Ethernet NM interface or 8-11. Management
Console interface Cables.
CLK RJ45 Clock input/output interface Refer to Table Refer to 10.4

8-12. Clock Cables.
TOD RJ45 Time input/output interface Refer to Table Refer to 10.4

8-13. Clock Cables.
ALMI/O RJ45 Alarm input/output interface Refer to Table -

8-14.
1 Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the NM interface
87654321 3 Receive positive of the NM interface
4 Grounding end of the Console interface
5 Receive end of the Console interface
6 Receive negative of the NM interface
7 Unspecified

Equipment
8 Transmit end of the Console interface
Table 8-12 Pins of the CLK interface
1 Negative receive end of external clock
2 Positive receive end of external clock
4 Negative transmit end of external clock
5 Positive transmit end of external clock
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified
Table 8-13 Pins of the TOD interface
External Time Input External Time Output

(1PPS + Time (1PPS + Time
87654321 3 Negative input for the 1pps Negative output for the 1pps
signal signal
4 Grounding end Grounding end
6 Positive input for the 1pps Positive output for the 1pps
signal signal
7 Negative input for time Negative output for time

information information

Equipment

8 Positive input for time Positive output for time

NOTE
The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding two working modes.
2 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Grounding end

parameter

parameter

The AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and
provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 8-15 lists the functions and features of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
Table 8-15 Functions and Features of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB
Basic funtion Cross-connect capacity AND1CXPA: 44 Gbit/s

AND1CXPB: 56 Gbit/s
Supports switching, control, and clock management.

Equipment
Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function.
Auxiliary interface function Provides one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s auto-sensing Ethernet
NM interface or Console interface for communication with
the NMS.
Provides one time input/output interface and provides the

synchronization time source for the equipment.
Provides one clock input/output interface and provides the

synchronization clock source for the equipment.

Tact switches Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector levers
to remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered to
start the active/standby protection switching.
NOTE
When you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switching
is triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers.

The AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module,
system control module, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply
module.
Figure 8-11 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1CXPA/
AND1CXPB.

Equipment
Figure 8-11 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB

Back plane
NM pass-through
NM network The other CXP
interface/serial System control
interface module
NM Active/standby board
Time input/output communication
interface communication bus
Auxiliary NM The other CXP
Clock input/output CPU control
interface serial interface
interface unit
module
Alarm input/output
interface Management
bus
Clock Time
signals signals
Serial
Time signals Logic control management bus
Clock unit PICs
processing Clock signals
module
Management
bus
Service signals
PICs
Under-voltage/over- Service processing and
Service
voltage detection bus grooming module
communication bus
The other CXP
-48V/-60V System
power supply
-48V/-60V System
Power supply power supply
module 12V
FAN
3.3V
Interface cards
Service Processing and Grooming Module

l Grooms services with switching capacity.

l Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.
System Control Module

This module mainly consists of the CPU control unit and logic control unit, which perform the
following functions:
l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardware
faults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment.
l The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects to
other chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips,
initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves log
control on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detects
the states of other boards.

Equipment
Clock Processing Module

l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
l Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals for
each boards.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization.
l Supports the NTP clock.

l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or console interface.

l Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface.
l Provides one alarm input/output interface.
Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies.

l Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies.
l Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the PIC boards in a centralized
manner.
8.3.4 CF Card and DIP Switch

A board has a set of DIP switches and a hot-swappable CF card.
CF Card and DIP Switch Locations

Figure 8-12 shows the locations of the CF card and DIP switches on AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.

Equipment
Figure 8-12 Locations of the CF card and DIP switches on AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
CF Card
DIP Switch
CF Card
The size of the CF card on AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB is 512 MB. The CF card is used to backup
data and load packages.
DIP Switch
Set DIP switches on AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB to 1, 1, 0, and 1. During startup, the device

deletes the loaded configuration file based on the DIF switch status.
NOTICE
personnel.
l After the configuration file is deleted, reset the DIF switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0. In this way,

The technical specifications of the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB include board dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.

Equipment
Board dimensions (mm): 22.86 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)
Weight (kg): 0.68
8.4 AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE - System Control, Cross-

The AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE (CXPB/CXPE for short) is a control, cross-connect, and
protocol processing board. The function version of the CXPB/CXPE is AND2. The CXPB/
CXPE is housed in slot 7 or slot 8.
Table 8-16 provides comparison between AND2CXPB, and AND2CXPE.
Table 8-16 Board Comparison
Board Type Cross-Connect Capacity 1588 ACR
AND2CXPB 44 Gbit/s Not supported
AND2CXPE 44 Gbit/s Supported
8.4.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE, there are indicators, buttons, switch for the
ejector lever, and interfaces.

Figure 8-13 and Figure 8-14 show the appearance of the front panel of the AND2CXPB/
AND2CXPE.
Figure 8-13 Front panel of the AND2CXPB
Figure 8-14 Front panel of the AND2CXPE

Equipment
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE:
l ACTX indicator, green, which indicates the cross-connection or clock active/standby status
l ACTC indicator, green, which indicates the active/standby system control board
Button
The following buttons are present on the front panel of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE:
l CF RCV button, which is reserved for later use.

l RRST button, which is used for reset on the board. When you press the RST button and
then release it, the board is reset.
l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, all
the board indicators on the NE are on.
Switch for the Ejector Lever

On the front panel, there are two switches for the two ejector levers on the front panel. To remove
a board, you need to push the two switches to the middle and then rotate the ejector levers.
Interface
Table 8-17 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE.
Table 8-17 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE

Front
Panel
ETH/ RJ45 10M/100M auto-sensing Refer to Table Refer to 10.2

OAM Ethernet NM interface or 8-18. Management
Console interface Cables.
CLK RJ45 Clock input/output interface Refer to Table Refer to 10.4

8-19. Clock Cables.
TOD RJ45 Time input/output interface Refer to Table Refer to 10.4

8-20. Clock Cables.

Equipment

Front
Panel
ALMI/O RJ45 Alarm input/output interface Refer to Table -

8-21.
1 Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Transmit negative of the NM interface
87654321 3 Receive positive of the NM interface
4 Grounding end of the Console interface
5 Receive end of the Console interface
6 Receive negative of the NM interface
7 Unspecified
8 Transmit end of the Console interface
Table 8-19 Pins of the CLK interface
1 Negative receive end of external clock
2 Positive receive end of external clock
4 Negative transmit end of external clock
5 Positive transmit end of external clock
6 Unspecified
7 Unspecified
8 Unspecified

Equipment
Table 8-20 Pins of the TOD interface

87654321 3 Negative input for the 1pps Negative output for the 1pps
signal signal
6 Positive input for the 1pps Positive output for the 1pps
signal signal
7 Negative input for time Negative output for time

8 Positive input for time Positive output for time

NOTE
The TOD interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of the preceding two working modes.
2 Grounding end
5 Grounding end
6 Grounding end

parameter

Equipment

parameter

The AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE controls the system, grooms services, processes the clock, and
provides auxiliary interfaces.
Table 8-22 lists the functions and features of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE.
Table 8-22 Functions and Features of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE
Basic function Cross-connect capacity AND1CXPB: 44 Gbit/s

AND1CXPE: 44 Gbit/s
Supports switching, control, and clock management.
Supports the board-level 1+1 backup function.
Auxiliary interface function Provides one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s auto-sensing Ethernet
NM interface or Console interface for communication with
the NMS.
Provides one time input/output interface and provides the

synchronization time source for the equipment.
Provides one clock input/output interface and provides the

synchronization clock source for the equipment.

Tact switches Provides two tact switches. When you rotate the ejector levers
to remove the board, the two tact switches are triggered to
start the active/standby protection switching.
NOTE
When you rotate only one ejector lever, the protection switching is not triggered. The protection switching
is triggered only when you rotate the two ejector levers.

The AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE mainly consists of the service processing and grooming module,
system control module, clock processing module, auxiliary interface module, and power supply
module.

Equipment
Figure 8-15 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND2CXPB/
AND2CXPE.
Figure 8-15 Block diagram for the functions of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE

Back plane
NM pass-through
NM network The other CXP
interface/serial System control
interface module
NM Active/standby board
Time input/output communication
interface communication bus
Auxiliary NM The other CXP
Clock input/output CPU control
interface serial interface
interface unit
module
Alarm input/output
interface Management
bus
Clock Time
signals signals
Serial
Time signals Logic control management bus
Clock unit PICs
processing Clock signals
module
Management
bus
Service signals
PICs
Under-voltage/over- Service processing and
Service
voltage detection bus grooming module
communication bus
The other CXP
-48V/-60V System
power supply
-48V/-60V System
Power supply power supply
module 12V
FAN
3.3V
Interface cards
Service Processing and Grooming Module

l Grooms services with switching capacity.

l Supports automatic switching and manual switching of the active and standby boards.
System Control Module

This module mainly consists of the CPU control unit and logic control unit, which perform the
following functions:
l The CPU control unit works with the logic control unit to detects alarms and hardware
faults, control boards, process overhead, and manage the equipment.
l The logic control unit provides interfaces through which the CPU control unit connects to
other chips on the board. The logic control unit specifies the working states of chips,
initializes chips, and operates the register. In addition, the logic control unit achieves log

Equipment
control on active/standby switching, monitors the working state of the board, and detects
the states of other boards.
Clock Processing Module

l Provides working clock signals for the key chips on the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE.
l Supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, and provides system clock signals for
each boards.
l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve clock/time synchronization.
l Supports the 1588 ACR clock (supported by AND2CXPE).
l Supports the NTP clock.

l Provides one NM Ethernet interface or console interface.

l Provides one time input/output interface and one time input/output interface.
l Provides one alarm input/output interface.
Power Supply Module

l Accesses two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power supplies.

l Detects and reports overvoltage and undervoltage of two input power supplies.
l Supplies 3.3 V working power for the local board and the PIC boards in a centralized
manner.
8.4.4 DIP Switch

A board has a set of DIP switches.
Figure 8-16 shows the locations of the DIP switches on AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE.

Equipment
Figure 8-16 Locations of the DIP switches on AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE.
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
拨码开关
Set DIP switches on AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE to 1, 1, 0, and 1. During startup, the device
deletes the loaded configuration file based on the DIF switch status.
NOTICE
personnel.
l After the configuration file is deleted, reset the DIF switches to 0, 0, 0, and 0. In this way,

The technical specifications of the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE include board dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.
Weight (kg): 0.68
Power consumption (W, room temperature): 28.4 (AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE)

Equipment
8.5 AND1EM4T - 4 Channels GE/FE Electrical Interface

Board
The AND1EM4T (EM4T for short) is a four channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface board.
The function version of the EM4T is AND1. The AND1EM4T is housed in any of slots 1 to 4
(when working with the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working
with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.5.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EM4T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-17 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EM4T.
Figure 8-17 Front panel of the AND1EM4T
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EM4T:
NOTE
Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port
transmit/receive status indicator (ACT).
Interface
Table 8-23 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM4T.

Equipment
Table 8-23 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM4T
Interfac Interfac Usage Pin Corresponding

e on the e Type Cable
Front
Panel
FE/GE0 RJ45 FE/GE auto-sensing Refer to Table 8-24. Refer to 10.5.1

to FE/ electrical interface Ethernet Cables.
GE3
Table 8-24 Pins of the FE/GE electrical interfaces

The AND1EM4T mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with
the control board.
Table 8-25 lists the functions and features of the AND1EM4T.
Table 8-25 Functions and features of the AND1EM4T

Feature
Basic function Provides four FE/GE electrical interfaces.

Equipment

Feature

Ethernet).

NOTE
or IEEE 1588v2.

The AND1EM4T mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module
Figure 8-18 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM4T.
Figure 8-18 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM4T

Back plane
4 x FE/GE
electrical signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus
Management Clock Clock signals

CXP
module module
Management bus
CXP
3.3V -48V/-60V System power

3.0V Power supply
Each module on the board 2.5V supply
1.2V module
supply
Transmit Direction
The service packets from AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB are sent to the service processing module
through the backplane-side interface of the AND1EM4T. The service processing module
identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then,
the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where
coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module
outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

Equipment
Receive Direction
The GE/FE interfaces on the front panel receive GE/FE service signals. Then, the service access
module performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends
the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service
packets, schedules the packets, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side
interface.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the GE/FE services from the interfaces on the
front panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends the
services to the service processing module.
processing module, performs coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion on the
packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.

interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service packets from the AND1CXPA/
AND1CXPB, identifies the destination interfaces of the packets, and buffers and schedules
the packets based on the access capability of the EM4T and the access bandwidth setting
at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM4T.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4T.

Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4T.
l 3.3 V

Equipment
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EM4T board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 8-26 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the AND1EM4T board.

Weight (kg): 0.44
8.6 AND1EM8T - 8 Channels GE/FE Electric Interface Board

The AND1EM8T (EM8T for short) is an eight channels FE/GE adaptive electrical interface
board. The function version of the EM8T is AND1. The AND1EM8T is housed in any of slots
1 to 2.
8.6.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EM8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-19 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EM8T.
Figure 8-19 Front panel of the AND1EM8T

Equipment
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EM8T:
NOTE
Above each service interface, there is a service port connection status indicator (LINK) and a service port
transmit/receive status indicator (ACT).
Interface
Table 8-27 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM8T.
Table 8-27 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM8T
Interfac Interfac Usage Pin Corresponding

e on the e Type Cable
Front
Panel
FE/GE0 RJ45 FE/GE auto-sensing Refer to Table 8-28. Refer to 10.5.1

to FE/ electrical interface Ethernet Cables.
GE7
Table 8-28 Pins of the FE/GE electrical interfaces

Equipment

The AND1EM8T mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE electrical signals, and processes the services with
the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
Table 8-29 lists the functions and features of the AND1EM8T.
Table 8-29 Functions and features of the AND1EM8T

Feature
Basic function Provides eight FE/GE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet).

NOTE
or IEEE 1588v2.

The AND1EM8T mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
Figure 8-20 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM8T.

Equipment
Figure 8-20 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM8T

Back plane
8 x FE/GE
electrical signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module module
Management bus
CXP
3.3V System power

-48V/-60V
3.0V Power
2.5V
supply
Each module on the board
1.8V
supply
1.2V module
supply
Transmit Direction
through the backplane-side interface of the AND1EM8T. The service processing module
identifies the destination interfaces for the packets, and buffers and schedules the packets. Then,
the service processing module sends the processed packets to the service access module, where
coding/decoding and serial/parallel conversion are performed. Finally, the service access module
outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
module performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends
the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers the service
packets, schedules the packets, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side
interface.

front panel, performs serial/parallel conversion and coding/decoding, and then sends the
packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.


Equipment
interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets from different
the packets based on the access capability of the EM8T and the access bandwidth setting
at each interface. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
Management Module
This module is used with the CXP to manage and control each module on the EM8T.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8T.
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8T.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.8 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EM8T board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 8-30 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces on the AND1EM8T board.


Equipment
Weight (kg): 0.46

The AND1EM4F (EM4F for short) is a four channels FE/GE optical interface board. The
function version of the EM4F is AND1. The AND1EM4F is housed in any of slots 1 to 4 (when
working with the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the
AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.7.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EM4F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-21shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EM4F.
Figure 8-21 Front panel of the AND1EM4F
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EM4F:
Interface
Four SFP interfaces are present on the EM4F. Table 8-31 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces on the EM4F.

Equipment
Table 8-31 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM4F

Panel Type nding
Fiber
Optical IN0 to IN3 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional Refer to

module optical module is used, this 10.6
interface for the GE optical signal. Fibers.

interface for the GE/FE optical
signal.
signal.

Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE

The AND1EM4F mainly accesses 4 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with
the control board.
Table 8-32 lists the functions and features of the AND1EM4F.
Table 8-32 Functions and features of the AND1EM4F
Basic function Description
Basic function Supports four FE/GE interfaces (SFP).

Equipment
Basic function Description
Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE optical

modules and GE electrical modules.

Ethernet).

NOTE
IEEE 1588v2.

The AND1EM4F mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
Figure 8-22 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM4F.
Figure 8-22 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM4F

Back plane
4 x FE/GE
optical signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module module
Management bus
CXP

3.0V Power supply
1.2V module
supply
Transmit Direction
through the backplane-side interface of the EM4F. The service processing module identifies the

Equipment
access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets, and finally outputs the packets through
the backplane-side interface.

conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on
the front panel.

service access module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces.
Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
the packets. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
Management Module
This module is used with the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB to manage and control each module on
the EM4F.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM4F.


Equipment
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM4F.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EM4F board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable optical/electrical FE/GE optical modules supported at SFP
interfaces on the AND1EM4F board, see Table 8-33, Table 8-34, Table 8-35, and Table
8-36. The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For
details on the specifications of optical/electrical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical
Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
CWDM

Equipment

bidirectional
Commercial
Weight (kg): 0.44
8.8 AND1EM4C: 4 Channels GE/FE Combo Board

The AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board is a 4 x FE/GE Combo board and its functional version
is AND1. The AND1EM4C is housed in any of slots 1 to 4 (when working with the AND1CXPA/
AND1CXPB) and in any of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).

Equipment
8.8.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board, there are indicators and
interfaces.
Appearance
Figure 8-23 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EM4C board.
Figure 8-23 Front panel of the EM4C board
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EM4C board:
l Status indicators (L/A0 to L/A3), green or orange, which indicate the port connection status
and data receiving and transmission status
l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status
l ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data receiving and transmission status of the
port
NOTE
There are four LINK indicators and four ACT indicators on the EM4C board. One LINK indicator and one
ACT indicator are present above each FE/GE electrical interface (RJ-45).
For the descriptions of the indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Interfaces
Table 8-37 describes the types and functions of the interfaces on the EM4C board.
Table 8-37 Interfaces on the EM4C board
Interfaces Interface Function Required Cable

Type
OUT0 IN0 to SFP FE/GE signal input/output For details, see 10.6 Optical
OUT3 IN3 interfaces Fibers.
FE/GE0 to FE/ RJ-45 FE/GE electrical signal input/ For details, see 10.5.1 Ethernet
GE3 output interfaces Cables.

Equipment
NOTE
The four SFP interfaces and four electrical interfaces are numbered from 0 to 3. Each SFP interface
corresponds to the electrical interface with the same number and the two interfaces are considered as a
group (for example, OUT0 IN0 and FE/GE0). The two interfaces in each group cannot be used at the same
time.
Table 8-38 SFP interfaces
Interface Supported Interface Function

s Pluggable Type
Modules
OUT0 IN0 FE optical LC FE/GE optical signal input/output interfaces

to OUT3 modules
IN3 GE optical
modules
Table 8-39 Pins of FE/GE electrical interfaces

The AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board provides four FE/GE SFP interfaces and four FE/GE
electrical interfaces, and it works with the system control board to transceive and process 4 x
FE/GE services.
Table 8-40 describes the functions and features of the EM4C board.

Equipment
Table 8-40 Functions and features of the EM4C board
Functions and Features Description
Basic functions Provides four FE/GE SFP interfaces and four FE/GE electrical
interfaces.
Supports temperature and voltage detection.
Interfaces FE/GE SFP interfaces support FE optical modules and GE

optical modules.

Supports flow control.
Clocks Supports physical-layer clock synchronization (synchronous

Ethernet).

NOTE
l The four FE/GE SFP interfaces and four FE/GE electrical interfaces are numbered from 0 to 3. Each
FE/GE SFP interface corresponds to the FE/GE electrical interface with the same number and the two
interfaces are considered as a group (for example, OUT0 IN0 and FE/GE0). The two interfaces in each
group cannot be used at the same time.
l When using a 10 Mbit/s electrical interface, the board does not support synchronous Ethernet or IEEE
1588v2.

The AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board consists of interfaces, an ETH module, a logic module,
a clock module, and a power module.
Figure 8-24 illustrates the working principle of the EM4C board.

Equipment
Figure 8-24 Working principle of the EM4C board

Backplane
AND1EM4C
1 x GE
SFP ETH
SFP Module CLK
SFP 1 x GE
ETH 4 x GE Signal
SFP Module CLK selection CXP
Service
RJ-45 1 x GE logic
ETH
RJ-45 CLK
Module CLK CXP
RJ-45
1 x GE
RJ-45 ETH
Module CLK
Control Control
logic CXP
Logic Module
-48V/-60V PIU
Clock Power
Module Module -48V/-60V
PIU

After the EM4C board receives FE/GE services through the SFP or electrical interfaces, the
Ethernet processing module performs encoding, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion of the
service data, extracts synchronous Ethernet clock signals, and transmits the service data to the
logic module. Then the service logic in the logic module buffers and schedules the service data,
processes synchronous Ethernet clock signals and IEEE 1588v2 packets, and transmits the
processed data to the active and standby system control boards.

After the EM4C board receives the service data from the active system control board, the service
logic in the logic module identifies the target interfaces of the service data, buffers and schedules
the service data, processes synchronous Ethernet clock signals and IEEE 1588v2 packets, and
transmits the processed data to the Ethernet processing module. Then the Ethernet processing
module performs encoding, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion of the service data, delivers
synchronous Ethernet clock signals downstream, and transmits the processed data through the
pre-determined SFP or electrical interfaces on the board.
ETH Module
The Ethernet processing module performs the following functions:
l Processes information on physical interfaces.

l Performs encoding, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion of service data.
l Extracts synchronous Ethernet clock signals.

Equipment
Logic Module
The logic module includes a service logic and a control logic.
l The service logic performs the following functions:

– Buffers and schedules service data.
– Identifies the target interfaces of the service data.
– Exchanges service data with the active and standby system control boards using the
dual-fed and selective receiving function.
– Supports synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588v2.
l The control logic works with the system control boards to manage and control each module
on the board.
Clock Module
The clock module provides the working clock for each module on the board.
Power Module
The power module provides a DC voltage for each module on the board.
8.8.4 Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance

Technical specifications of the AND1EM4C (EM4C for short) board include interface
l For the specifications of FE/GE electrical interfaces, see Table 8-41.
l For information about the swappable FE/GE optical modules supported at FE/GE (SFP)
interfaces, see Table 8-42 and Table 8-43. The interface specifications depend on the
optical/electrical modules on the board. For details on the specifications of optical/electrical
modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules.


bidirectional

Equipment
S4015715 eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, LC, Single-mode, 40 km Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
CWDM

bidirectional
Commercial
Dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D)
Weight (kg): 0.46

Equipment
Power consumption under room temperature (W): 9.4

The AND1EM8F (EM8F for short) is an eight channels FE/GE optical interface board. The
function version of the EM8F is AND1. The AND1EM8F is housed in any of slots 1 to 2.
8.9.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EM8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-25 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EM8F.
Figure 8-25 Front panel of the AND1EM8F
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EM8F:
Interface
Eight SFP interfaces are present on the EM8F. Table 8-44 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces on the EM8F.

Equipment
Table 8-44 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EM8F

Panel Type nding
Cable
Fiber
Optical IN0 to IN7 LC When a two-fiber bidirectional Refer to

interface optical module is used, this 10.6
interface for the GE optical signal. Fibers.

signal.
signal.

Ethernet
Cables.
NOTE

The AND1EM8F mainly accesses 8 x FE/GE optical signals, and processes the services with
the AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB.
Table 8-45 lists the functions and features of the AND1CXPA/AND1EM8F.
Table 8-45 Functions and features of the AND1EM8F
Basic function Supports eight FE/GE interfaces (SFP).

Equipment
Interface function Supports FE optical modules, FE electrical modules, GE

optical modules and GE electrical modules.

Ethernet).

NOTE
IEEE 1588v2.

The AND1EM8F mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
Figure 8-26 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM8F.
Figure 8-26 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EM8F

Back plane
8 x FE/GE
optical signals Service signals Service Service signals
Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module module
Management bus
CXP

3.0V Power supply
1.2V module
supply
Transmit Direction
through the backplane-side interface of the EM8F. The service processing module identifies the

Equipment
access module outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on the front panel.
Receive Direction
module buffers the service packets, schedules the packets, and finally outputs the packets through
the backplane-side interface.

conversion on the packets, and then outputs the packets through the GE/FE interfaces on
the front panel.

service access module. Then, this module schedules packets from different interfaces.
Finally, this module outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
the packets. Finally, this module outputs the packets to the service access module.
Management Module
the EM8F.
Clock Module
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EM8F.


Equipment
Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EM8F.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.8 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EM8F board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable FE/GE optical/electrical modules supported at SFP
interfaces on the AND1EM8F board, see Table 8-46, Table 8-47, Table 8-48, and Table
8-49. The interface specifications depend on the optical/electrical modules on the board. For
details on the specifications of optical/electrical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical
Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional

Equipment
34060481 eSFP, 1491nm, LC, Single-mode, 80 km CWDM

Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial
Weight (kg): 0.46

Equipment
8.10 AND1EX1 - 1 Channel 10 GE Optical Interface Board

The AND1EX1 (EX1 for short) is a one channel 10 GE optical interface board. The function
version of the EX1 is AND1. The AND1EX1 is housed in any of slots 5 to 6 (when working
with the AND1CXPA), in any of slots 3 to 6 (when working with the AND1CXPB), and in any
of slots 1 to 6 (when working with the AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE).
8.10.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1EX1, there are indicators and an interface.

Figure 8-27 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1EX1.
Figure 8-27 Front panel of the AND1EX1
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1EX1:
l L/A indicators, green or orange, which indicate the port connection status and data transmit/
receive status
Interface
One XFP interface is present on the AND1EX1. Table 8-50 lists the types and usage of the
interfaces on the AND1EX1.
Table 8-50 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND1EX1

Panel Type nding
Fiber
Optical IN LC Input interface for the 10GE Refer to

interface optical signal 10.6
Optical
OUT LC Output interface for the 10GE Fibers.
optical signal

Equipment

The AND1EX1 mainly accesses one channel of 10 GE signal, and processes the services with
the control board.
Table 8-51 lists the functions and features of the AND1EX1.
Table 8-51 Functions and features of the AND1EX1
Basic function Supports one 10GE interfaces (XFP).
Interface function Supports 10GE optical modules.
Clock Supports physical-layer clock synchronization

(synchronous Ethernet).

AND1EX1 mainly consists of the service access module, service processing module,
management module, clock module, and power supply module
Figure 8-28 shows the block diagram for the functions of the AND1EX1.
Figure 8-28 Block diagram for the functions of the AND1EX1

Back plane
1 x 10GE signal Service signals Service Service signals
Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module module
Management bus
CXP

3.3V Power supply
1.2V module
supply

Equipment
Transmit Direction
through the backplane-side interface of the EX1. The service processing module buffers and
schedules the packets. Then, the service processing module sends the processed packets to the
service access module, where coding/decoding, and serial/parallel conversion are performed.
Finally, the service access module outputs the packets through the 10 GE interface on the front
panel.
Receive Direction
The 10 GE interface on the front panel receives 10 GE service signals. Then, the service access
module performs serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding on the services, and then sends
the services to the service processing module. The service processing module buffers and
schedules the service packets, and finally outputs the packets through the backplane-side
interface.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the 10 GE services from the interfaces on the
front panel, performs serial/parallel conversion, and coding/decoding, and then sends the
packets, and then outputs the packets through the 10 GE interfaces on the front panel.

interface conversion module. Then, this module schedules packets based on the access
capability of the EX1 and the access bandwidth settings at the interface. Finally, this module
outputs the packets through the backplane-side interface.
AND1CXPB, buffers and schedules the packets. Finally, this module outputs the packets
Management Module
the EX1.
Clock Module

Equipment
l Provides the working clock for each module on the EX1.

Power Supply Module

This module provides the DC power of the following specifications to each module on the EX1.
l 5.0 V
l 3.3 V
l 1.8 V
l 1.2 V

Technical specifications of the AND1EX1 board include interface specifications and physical
specifications.
For information about the swappable optical modules supported at XFP interfaces on the
AND1EX1 board, see Table 8-52. The interface specifications depend on the optical modules
on the board. For details on the specifications of optical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/
Electrical Modules.
Table 8-52 Information about 10GE optical modules
S4015772 XFP, 1310 nm, LC, Singlemode, 10 km Two-fiber

bidirectional
S4015776 XFP, 1550 nm, LC, Singlemode, 40 km
Commercial
S4015794 XFP, 1550 nm, LC, Singlemode, 80 km
34060547 XFP, 1471 nm, LC, Singlemode, 70 km Two-fiber

bidirectional
34060548 XFP, 1491 nm, LC, Singlemode, 70 km
CWDM
34060549 XFP, 1511 nm, LC, Singlemode, 70 km Commercial

Equipment
34060568 TXFP, 1529.163 nm to 1560.606 nm (wavelength tunable), Two-fiber

LC, Singlemode, 40 km bidirectional
DWDM
34060532 XFP, 1529.55 nm, LC, Singlemode, 80 km
Commercial
Weight (kg): 0.42
8.11 AND2CQ1B - 4 Channels Channelized OC-3c/STM-1c

POS Optical Interface Board
This section describes the AND2CQ1B, a 4 channels channelized OC-3c/STM-1c POS optical
interface board, in terms of the overview, functions, features, working principle, front panel, and
technical specifications.

Equipment
8.11.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND2CQ1B board, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-29 shows the front panel of the AND2CQ1B board.
Figure 8-29 Front panel of the AND2CQ1B board
Indicator
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND2CQ1B board:
l LOS1 to LOS4 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status
For details on meanings of the indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Interfaces
Four SFP interfaces are present on the front panel of the AND2CQ1B board. Table 8-53 lists
the types and usage of the interfaces. For details on fiber connections to these interfaces, see
10.6 Optical Fibers.
Table 8-53 Types and usage of the interfaces on the AND2CQ1B board
Interface on the Front Interface Type Usage

Panel
IN0 to IN1 LC Input interface for STM-1

(VC12) optical signals
OUT0 to OUT1 LC Output interface for STM-1

(VC12) optical signals
NOTE
service signals.

Equipment

When working with the main control board, the AND2CQ1B board receives and processes 4
channels STM-1(VC12) signals.
Table 8-54 lists the functions and features of the AND2CQ1B.
Table 8-54 Functions and features of the AND2CQ1B
Function and Remarks

Feature
Basic function Provides four channelized STM-1 optical interfaces.
CPOS interface The CPOS interface supports FE optical modules.

function
The CPOS interface supports inloops and outloops.
The E1 channel supports the PRBS test.
The E1 channel supports inloops and outloops.
The E1 channel supports the master/slave clock modes.
The E1 channel supports the serial interface in the E1 and CE1 modes.
The serial interface supports the ATM, TDM, and PPP protocols.
CPOS-Trunk Number of CPOS-Trunk 2

interface member interfaces
The E1 channel supports the serial interface in the E1 and CE1 modes.
The Trunk-serial interface supports the TDM and PPP protocols.
Supports the APS protocol. 1+1 unidirectional protection

E1 services

groups
links supported by each
IMA group
Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N

≤32) or 1-to-1 format.
Number of supported 1024

PVCs/PVPs

Equipment
Function and Remarks

Feature

ATM CCCs

remote ATM PWE3s

TDM CCCs

remote TDM PWE3s

links

PPP groups

group
Number of supported global 64

MP groups

supported by each global
MP group

The AND2CQ1B board consists of an SDH processing module, a logic processing module, a
data processing module, a management module, a clock module, and a power supply module.
Figure 8-30 shows the functional block diagram of the AND2CQ1B board.

Equipment
Figure 8-30 Functional block diagram of the AND2CQ1B board

Backplane
Service Service signals

SDH Service
4 xSTM-1(VC12)signals CXP A
signal Logic processing signal Data processing
processing Service signals
module module CXP B
module
Management bus Management bus Management bus
Management Management bus

CXP
module
Clock System clock signals

CXP
module
3.3 V -48 V/-60 V

3.0 V Power PIU
2.5 V
1.5V supply -48 V/-60 V
1.2 V module PIU
1.0 V
0.75 V
Upstream Direction
In the receive direction, the SDH processing module accesses 4 x channelized STM-1 services
through the interface on the front panel. This module decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from the
STM-1 signals, recovers the E1 signals, processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm
signals, and sends the processed signals to the logic processing module. Then, the logic
processing module rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals, and sends the
signals to the data processing module for PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling. Finally, the
signals are sent to the main control board through the interface on the backplane.
Transmit Direction
In the transmit direction, the data processing module receives the signals from the the main
control board, identifies the signals, performs the PWE3 decapsulation, and then sends the
signals to the logic processing module. The logic processing module processes various signals,
schedules queues, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module. The SDH
processing module maps the E1 signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots
to the STM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and
sends out the STM-1 signals through the interface on the front panel.
SDH Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module recovers clock or data from the received 4 channels
STM-1(VC12) signals, align frames, descrambles signals, processes SOHs, adjusts
pointers, processes POHs. Then it sends the signals to the logic processing module over a
bus for further processing.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from the logic processing
module, reframes VC-3 or VC-4 signals, adds overheads and pointers, processes alarms,

Equipment
and sends 4 channels STM-1(VC12) signals to other boards through the interfaces on the
front panel.
l This module performs LMSP protection switching to protect services against failures.
l This module extracts and recovers the line clock.
logic Processing Module

l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the SDH processing module,
rearranges the frames of the E1 signals, performs processing and suppression of timeslots
of the CES services. Then, the processed signals are sent to the data processing module.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the data processing module,
and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module.
Data Processing Module

This module performs the following functions.
l In the receive direction, this module obtains PW information about the service, encapsulates
signals in PWE3, schedules PWs, and sends the signals to main control board through the
backplane-side interfaces.
l In the transmit direction, this module receives service signals from main control board,
determines the service signal type, decapsulates PWE3 signals, and schedules the signals.
Management Module
This module works with main control board to manage and control other modules on the board.
Clock Module
l Processes the line clock.

l Receives the system clock from main control board and provides the working clock for
each module on the board.
l Supports the synchronization status message (SSM) protocol.
Power Supply Module

This module provides required voltages for other modules on the board.
l 3.3 V
l 3.0 V
l 2.5 V
l 1.5 V
l 1.2 V
l 1.0 V
l 0.75 V

Equipment

The technical specifications of the AND1CQ1B board cover interface specifications, board
For information about the swappable optical modules supported by SFP interfaces on the
AND2CQ1B board, see Table 8-55. The interface specifications depend on the optical modules
on the board. For details on the optical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical
Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial
Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D)
Weight (kg): 0.47
Power consumption (W): 11.50
8.12 AND2PQ1: 4 Channels OC-3/STM-1 POS Optical

Interface Board
The AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board is a 4 x OC-3/STM-1 POS optical interface board and its
functional version is AND2. It is configured in any of slots 1 to 6 in a chassis.
8.12.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board, there are indicators and four optical
interfaces.
Appearance
Figure 8-31 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PQ1 board.

Equipment
Figure 8-31 Front panel of the PQ1 board
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the PQ1 board:
l LOS0, LOS1, LOS2, and LOS3, red or green, which indicate the port status
For the descriptions of the indicators, see 12.1 Indicators.
Interfaces
There are four SFP interfaces on the PQ1 board. Table 8-56 describes the types and functions
of the interfaces. For details on the required optical fibers, see 10.6 Optical Fibers.
Table 8-56 Interfaces on the PQ1 board
Interfaces Interface Type Function
IN0 to IN3 LC STM-1 optical signal input

interfaces
OUT0 to OUT3 LC STM-1 optical signal output

interfaces
NOTE
service signals.

The AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board works with the system control board to transceive and
process 4 x STM-1 (POS) data services.
Table 8-57 describes the functions and features of the PQ1 board.

Equipment
Table 8-57 Functions and features of the PQ1 board
Functions and Description

Features
Basic functions Provides four POS optical interfaces.
Supports temperature and voltage detection.
Interfaces Supports FE optical modules.
Supports the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

The AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board consists of interfaces, an SDH processing module, a logic
module, a data processing module, a clock module, and a power module.
Figure 8-32 illustrates the working principle of the PQ1 board.
Figure 8-32 Working principle of the PQ1 board

Backplane
AND2PQ1
STM-1
SFP
Signal selection
STM-1
SFP 4 x VC4 Service 4 x VC4 1 x GE
Data CXP
SDH logic Module
STM-1 Module
SFP
STM-1
SFP
Control Control
logic CXP
Logic
Module
-48V/-60V
Power PIU
Clock
Module -48V/-60V PIU
Module

Equipment

The SDH processing module receives 4 x channelized STM-1 services through the interface on
the front panel, processes STM-1 section and channel overheads, pointers, and alarms, and
transmits the scrambled signals to the logic module. The service logic of the logic module
transparently transmits VC-4 services. Then the data processing module encapsulates the service
signals into frames and transmits the frames to the active and standby system control boards
through GE channels.

The PQ1 board receives service data from the active system control board, decapsulates the
service data, and transmits the processed data to the logic module. The service logic of the logic
module transparently transmits VC-4 services. Then the SDH processing module encapsulates
the service signals into STM-1 signals, adds overheads and pointers to the signals, processes
alarms, and transmits the STM-1 signals through the interfaces on the front panel.
SDH Processing Module

The SDH processing module processes STM-1 section and channel overheads, pointers, and
alarms.
Logic Module
The service logic of the logic module transparently transmits VC-4 services.
The control logic works with the system control boards to manage and control each module on
the board.
Data Processing Module

The data processing module performs the following functions.
l Encapsulates and decapsulates VC-4 service signals.
l Dually transmits and selectively receives data from/to the active and standby system control
boards.
Clock Module
The clock module provides the working clock for each module on the board.
Power Module
The power module provides a DC voltage for each module on the board.
8.12.4 Technical Specifications and Standards Compliance

Technical specifications of the AND2PQ1 (PQ1 for short) board include interface specifications,
board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
For information about the swappable optical modules supported at SFP interfaces on the
AND2PQ1 board, see Table 8-58. The interface specifications depend on the optical modules

Equipment
on the board. For details on the specifications of optical modules, see 9 Swappable Optical/
Electrical Modules.

bidirectional
Commercial

bidirectional
Commercial
Dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 193.80 (W) x 225.75 (D)
Weight (kg): 0.47
Power consumption (W): 11.50
8.13 AND1ML1/AND1ML1A - 16 Channels E1 Electrical

Interface Board
3 or slot 4.
NOTE
The AND1ML1 and AND1ML1A have the same functions and features except for the matched impedance
(AND1ML1: 75 ohms E1; AND1ML1A: 120 ohms E1).
8.13.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-33 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1ML1.
Figure 8-33 Front panel of the AND1ML1

Equipment
Figure 8-34 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AND1ML1A.
Figure 8-34 Front panel of the AND1ML1A
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A:
Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A. Table
8-59 lists the type and usage of the interface. For cables corresponding to the interfaces, see
Table 8-59 Type and usage of the interface on the front panel of the ML1

on the Type
Front AND1ML1 AND1ML1A
Panel
1 - 16 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used to 120-ohm interface, which is

transmit or receive the first to used to transmit or receive the
sixteenth channels of E1 services. first to sixteenth channels of
E1 services.
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28

Equipment
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

Equipment

The AND1ML1 is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND1ML1A is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND1ML1/ML1A can access a maximum of 16 x E1 signals, supports flexible configuration
of different services on each port, and is hot swappable.
Table 8-61 lists functions and features of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.
Table 8-61 Functions and features of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND1ML1: 75 ohm

interface
AND1ML1A: 120 ohm


E1 services

groups


PVPs

ATM CCCs

ATM PWE3s

Equipment



TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s

links

PPP groups

group

The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A mainly consists of the control module, line-side processing
module, system-side processing module, backplane interface module, clock module, and power
supply module.
Figure 8-35shows the block diagram for the working principle of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.

Equipment
Figure 8-35 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Backplane
1.2 V -48 V/-60 V

1.26 V -48 V/-60 V
2.5 V module
3.3 V 3.3 V
Service Service Service bus

16 x E1 signals Line-side bus System-side bus Backplane Active CXP
processing interface Service bus
module processing module module
Standby CXP
Serial
Management bus
management
bus
Management bus Control module CXP

To each module Clock module CXP
In Transmit Direction
The AND1ML1/AND1ML1A first distributes the signals in Ethernet packets from the backplane
to different protocol processing chips according to the service types. The system-side processing
module decapsulates the concatenated services and buffers the services in queues. Then, this
module schedules the egress queues according to the service types, processes and converts the
services, and finally sends the services to the line-side processing module. The line-side
processing module performs coding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving for the services,
and finally sends the services to E1 interfaces.
In Receive Direction
The line processing module performs impedance match, signal equalization, signal level
conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding for the accessed E1 signals. Then, the
signals are sent into the system-side processing module, which frames the signals, encapsulates
the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP services in PWE3, and schedules PWs. Finally, this module sends
the signals in Ethernet packets to the backplane interface module.
Line-Side Processing Module

In the receive channel, this module performs impedance match, signal equalization, electrical
level conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding to signals. In the transmit channel,
this module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving to signals.

Equipment
System-Side Processing Module

This module frames 16 x E1 signals, runs the CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols, and performs
PWE3 encapsulation.
Backplane Interface Module

The service bus receives or transmits service signals.
Control Module
This module controls the reading and writing on the chip, resets the chip, and detects faults in
the chip. When used with the control board, this module controls the board.
Clock Module
This module provides various clock signals for the board to operate normally, detects clocks,
and selects the line recovery clock.
Power Supply Module

This module converts the -48 V DC/-60 V DC voltage to DC voltages required by each module
on the board.
The technical specifications of the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A include the interface
specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 8-62 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A.
Table 8-62 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1ML1/AND1ML1A
Interface impedance 75 ohms (AND1ML1)

120 ohms (AND1ML1A)
Interface code HDB3

interface


input interface

Equipment
Weight (kg): 0.56(1.23 lb)
8.14 AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B - 16 Channels E1 Interface

Board
in slots 1 to 6.
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the AND3ML1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an
interface on the AND3ML1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and
features of the AND3ML1A and AND3ML1B are the same.
8.14.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-36 and Figure 8-37 show the appearances of the front panel of the AND3ML1A/
AND3ML1B.
Figure 8-36 Front panels of the AND3ML1A
Figure 8-37 Front panels of the AND3ML1B

Equipment
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B:
Interfaces
There is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B. Table
Table 8-63 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B

on the Type
Front AND3ML1A AND3ML1B
Panel
0 - 15 Anea 96 75-ohm interface, which is used 120-ohm interface, which is

to transmit or receive the zero used to transmit or receive the
to fifteenth channels of E1 zero to fifteenth channels of E1
services. services.
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5

Equipment
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

AND3ML1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND3ML1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B must be used with the system control board to access and process
16 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B can be
Table 8-65 lists the functions and features of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B.

Equipment
Table 8-65 Functions and features of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND3ML1A: 75 ohm

interface
AND3ML1B: 120 ohm


E1 services

groups


PVPs

ATM CCCs

ATM PWE3s



Equipment

TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s

links

PPP groups

group

The AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B mainly consists of the service access module, service
Figure 8-38 shows the functional block diagram of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B.
Figure 8-38 Functional block diagram of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B

Backplane

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module
-48V/-60V System
3.3V Power
Clock . . power supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System
power supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
Transmit Direction

Equipment
Receive Direction


Management Module
Clock Module

Equipment
Power Supply Module

on the board.

The technical specifications of the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B include the interface
Table 8-66 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B.
Table 8-66 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B
Interface impedance 75 ohm (ML1A)

120 ohm (ML1B)
Interface code HDB3


interface
Weight (kg): 0.44(0.97 lb)

Equipment
8.15 AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B - 32 Channels E1 Interface

Board
in slots 1 to 6.
NOTE
The mapping impedance of an interface on the AND2MD1A is 75 ohm, and the mapping impedance of an
interface on the AND2MD1B is 120 ohm. Except the difference of mapping impedance, the functions and
features of the AND2MD1A and AND2MD1B are the same.
8.15.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B, there are indicators and interfaces.

Figure 8-39 shows the appearances of the front panel of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B.
Figure 8-39 Front panels of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B:
Interfaces
There are two Anea 96 interfaces on the front panel of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B. Table

Equipment
Table 8-67 Type and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B
Interfac Interfac Usage

e on the e Type
Front AND2MD1A AND2MD1B
Panel

to transmit or receive the zero to to transmit or receive the zero to
fifteenth channels of E1 fifteenth channels of E1 services.
services.

to transmit or receive the to transmit or receive the
sixteenth to thirty-first channels sixteenth to thirty-first channels
of E1 services. of E1 services.
1 Rx0 25 Tx0
2 26
3 Rx1 27 Tx1
4 28
5 Rx2 29 Tx2
6 30
7 Rx3 31 Tx3
8 32
9 Rx4 33 Tx4
10 34
11 Rx5 35 Tx5
12 36
13 Rx6 37 Tx6
14 38
15 Rx7 39 Tx7
16 40

Equipment
17 Rx8 41 Tx8
18 42
19 Rx9 43 Tx9
20 44
21 R x 10 45 T x 10
22 46
23 R x 11 47 T x 11
24 48
49 R x 12 73 T x 12
50 74
51 R x 13 75 T x 13
52 76
53 R x 14 77 T x 14
54 78
55 R x 15 79 T x 15
56 80

The AND2MD1A is a 75-ohm E1 board and the AND2MD1B is a 120-ohm E1 board. The
AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B must be used with the system control board to access and process
32 channels of E1 services. Services at interfaces on the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B can be
Table 8-69 lists the functions and features of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B.
Table 8-69 Functions and features of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B
Interface function Impedance supported by the AND2MD1A: 75 ohm

interface

Equipment
AND2MD1B: 120 ohm


E1 services

groups
Maximum number of E1 16a



PVPs

ATM CCCs

ATM PWE3s

Supports fractional E1. Different timeslots of an E1 can be

bound to different CES PWs.

TDM CCCs

TDM PWE3s

links

Equipment

PPP groups
Maximum number of links 16b

group

NOTE
a: In the case of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1
ports cannot be bundled to an IMA group.
b: In the case of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B, the links corresponding to the former 16 and latter 16 E1
ports cannot be bundled to an ML-PPP group.

The AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B mainly consists of the service access module, service
Figure 8-40 shows the functional block diagram of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B.
Figure 8-40 Functional block diagram of the AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B

Backplane

Service access
processing CXP
module
module
Management bus

CXP
module

3.3V Power
Clock . . supply
. .
supply
module . .
-48V/-60V
1V module System power
supply
System clocks
Line clocks CXP
CXP
Transmit Direction

Equipment
Receive Direction


Management Module
Clock Module

Equipment
Power Supply Module

on the board.

The technical specifications of the include the interface specifications and physical
specifications.
Table 8-70 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the .
Table 8-70 Specifications of the interfaces on the
Interface impedance 75 ohm (MD1A)

120 ohm (MD1B)
Interface code HDB3

interface


input interface
Weight (kg): 0.49(1.08 lb)
8.16 TND1PIU - Power Interface Board

The TND1PIU (PIU for short) is a power interface board. The function version of the PIU is
TND1. The PIU is housed in slot 9 or slot 10.

Equipment
8.16.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators, power supply interfaces, and a label.

Figure 8-41 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 8-41 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU
Indicators
The following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU.
PWR, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWR is on and green, it indicates
that power is accessed.
Interfaces
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 8-71 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and
their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see 10.1 Power Supply Cables
and Ground Cables.
Table 8-71 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface on the Front Usage

Panel
NEG(-) -48 V power input interface
RTN(+) BGND power input interface

Equipment
Label
Operation warning label: indicates the following precautions , which should be taken for removal
or insertion of the PIU board.
NOTICE
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
make sure that these power supplies are disabled.
Before removing the PIU board, ensure that all power inputs are disconnected from the board.

The PIU, a power interface board, supports the functions and features such as power access,
power protection, surge protection detection, and information reporting.
Table 8-72 lists functions and features of the PIU.
Table 8-72 Functions and features of the PIU
Power access Each of the two PIU accesses one -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) power
supply for the equipment.
Power protection The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and short
circuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shocking
board and components on it.
Surge protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an
alarm if the protection fails.
Power backup Two PIUs for a hot backup. One PIU is capable of supplying power
for the entire chassis.

The PIU mainly consists of the surge protection and failure detection module, communication
unit module, slot ID module, and board in-position module.
Figure 8-42 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU.

Equipment
Figure 8-42 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V Communication unit
module Each board
Surge protection failure alarm signals

Inter-board
Surge protection and failure communication bus
CXP
detection module
Board in-position
signals
Slot ID module CXP
Slot ID signals
Board in-position module CXP
Surge Protection and Failure Detection Module

This module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightning
circuit. If the surge protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the control board.

This module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB version
information, and alarm signals about the surge protection failure.
Slot ID Module
This module reports the slot ID information to the control board.

The technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,
and input voltage.
Table 8-73 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.
Table 8-73 Technical specifications of the PIU
Weight (kg) 0.12
Power consumption (W, room temperature) 0.5

Equipment
Input voltage (V) -38.4 to -72.0
Ambient temperature –40 ºC to +65 ºC
8.17 AND1FAN - Fan Board

The AND1FAN (FAN for short) is an FAN board. The function version of the FAN is AND1.
8.17.1 Front Panel

On the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

Figure 8-43 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans.

l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms.

Equipment
l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms.

l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms.
The CRIT, MAJ, and MIN indicators on the front panel of the FAN indicate the current alarm
severity of the subrack.
ESD Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the human body.
Handle
The handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during board
replacement.
Label
The following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN:
l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.

The FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.
The functions and features of the FAN are as follows:
l Accesses two 12 V power supplies for driving six fans.

l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and
filters the lower frequency.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the
system.
l Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, version
number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.

The FAN mainly consists of the combiner/start-delay module, filter module, communication
unit module, intelligent fan speed adjustment module, and board in-position module.
Figure 8-44 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.

Equipment
Figure 8-44 Block diagram for the working principle of the AND1FAN
Fans x 6
12 V
12 V
12 V
CXP
Start-delay Combiner
Filter module
CXP
12 V Combiner/
12 V
soft-start module
12 V power shut signals
Communication unit
module Inter-board communication bus
CXP
Fan rotating speed signals

Fan speed
reporting module CXP
PWM signals PWM driver

module CXP
Intelligent fan speed

adjustment module
Board in-position Fan in-position signals

CXP
module
Start-delay/Combiner Module
This module provides start delay to the combined two 12 V power supplies and protecting fans
against overcurrent.
Filter Module
This module filters the LC low frequency to enhance the EMC feature of the system.

This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environment
temperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the start-
delay module.
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module

This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the control board and adjusts
the fan rotating speed according to the pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from
the control board.

Equipment

The technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and input voltage.
Table 8-74 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.
Table 8-74 Technical specifications of the FAN
Weight (kg) 0.302
Power consumption (W) l Low rate: 4.1

l Medium rate: 13.6
l High rate: 29.6
Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power
Ambient temperature –40 ºC to +65 ºC
8.18 Filler Panel

8.18.1 Appearance and Valid Slots

There is no indicator or interface on a filler panel.
Appearance
Figure 8-45 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 8-45 Appearance of a filler panel
Valid Slots
The filler panel of a control board can be housed in slot 7 or 8 of a chassis and the filler panel
of an interface board can be housed in any of slots 1-6 of a chassis. Table 8-75 provides the

Equipment
dimensions of the filler panel for a control board and dimensions of the filler panel for an interface
board.
Table 8-75 Filler panel dimensions
Type Dimensions (H x W x D)
Filler panel for a control board 22.86 mm x 193.80 mm x 23.5 mm
Filler panel for an interface board 20.32 mm x 193.80 mm x 23.2 mm

A filler panel can be used to perform electromagnetic shielding, keep out foreign substances,
and ensure proper ventilation.
Main functions of a filler panel are as follows:
l Performs electromagnetic shielding and ensures that the chassis meets the requirement of
electromagnetic radiation.
l Prevents foreign substances from getting into the chassis.
l Prevents internal voltage from being exposed.
l Ensures proper ventilation of cooling current inside the chassis.

Equipment
Hardware Description 9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules
9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules
About This Chapter
The ATN device does not provide optical interfaces, whereas the panel provides interfaces for
installing optical modules. The optical modules receive and transmit optical signals and convert
electrical and optical signals. The interfaces for installing optical modules can also be used for
installing electrical modules to transmit electrical signals.
9.1 Overview
Optical and electrical modules for ATN devices are hot swappable. Optical modules transmit
services using optical signals over fibers and electrical modules transmit services using electrical
signals over Ethernet cables.
9.2 FE Optical Module
9.3 GE Optical Module
9.4 10GE Optical Module
9.5 Electrical Module

Equipment
9.1 Overview
Optical and electrical modules for ATN devices are hot swappable. Optical modules transmit
services using optical signals over fibers and electrical modules transmit services using electrical
signals over Ethernet cables.
Classification
Optical modules for ATN devices can be classified as follows:
l By service and rate: FE, GE, 10GE optical modules

l By packaging: SFP, eSFP, XFP, TXFP optical modules
– SFP optical modules are used to support FE and GE services. eSFP optical modules are
enhanced SFP optical modules. They provide the same functions as SFP modules except
that eSFP optical modules are added with the performance reporting function.
– XFP optical modules are used to support 10GE services. TXFP optical modules are one
type of XFP optical modules and support wavelength adjustment.
l By usage scenario: business and industry modules
– If the operating temperature for an ATN device is within the range of -20 °C to +60 °
C, business modules apply.
– If the operating temperature for an ATN device is outside the range of -20 °C to +60 °
C, industry modules apply.
l By WDM application: colorless and colored optical modules
– Colorless (or gray) optical modules are common optical modules. They support
wavelengths within a specific range.
– Colored optical modules support a specific wavelength (with a small tolerance). On
them, wavelength conversion can be ignored and the wavelength can be directly added
to a multiplexer/demultiplexer board. Colored optical modules are classified into coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) and dense wavelength division
multiplexing (DWDM) optical modules by the wavelength division density.
l By fiber carrier: two-fiber bidirectional and single-fiber bidirectional optical modules
– A single-fiber bidirectional module provides only one LC interface for connecting to
one fiber. It receives and sends optical signals in one fiber but over two different
wavelengths.
– A two-fiber bidirectional module provides two LC interfaces for connecting to two
fibers. It receives and sends optical signals in two different fibers.
Electrical modules for ATN devices are all SFP modules, which are used to support FE or GE
services.
Appearance
Optical and electrical modules have different appearance because they use different packaging
and cable interfaces.
SFP and eSFP optical modules have the same appearance. Currently eSFP optical modules are
used on most of ATN devices. Figure 9-1 shows the eSFP optical module appearance.

Equipment
Figure 9-1 eSFP optical module appearance
Single-fiber Two-fiber
bidirectional bidirectional
Figure 9-2 shows the SFP electrical module appearance.
Figure 9-2 SFP electrical module appearance
Figure 9-3 shows the XFP optical module appearance.
Figure 9-3 XFP optical module appearance

Equipment
Application
An optical or electrical module can be used at an optical interface if its packaging and service
rate can match the interface.
Packaging:
l SFP optical interfaces use SFP/eSFP optical or electrical modules.

l XFP optical interfaces use XFP optical modules.
Service rate:
l FE and STM-1 optical interfaces match FE optical or electrical modules.

l GE optical interfaces match GE optical or electrical modules.
l FE/GE optical interfaces match FE/GE optical or electrical modules.
l 10GE optical interfaces match 10GE optical modules.
NOTE
In most cases, an optical or electrical module can be used at an optical interface if its packaging and service
rate can match the interface. Certain boards may not support electrical modules. For information about the
modules that a board supports, see the Functions and Features topic for the board.
9.2 FE Optical Module

FE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the FE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional)
Item Specification
Optical interface Two-fiber bidirectional interface

type
100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX
(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Encapsulation type eSFP eSFP eSFP
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working wavelength 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

range (nm)
Mean launched -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

optical power (dBm)
Receiving sensitivity -28 -34 -34

(dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -10 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 10

ratio (dB)

Equipment
Item Specification
Optical module code S4015755 S4015715 34060282
Table 9-2 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Specification
Optical interface type LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface
100BASE-FX 100BASE-FX
STM-1 STM-1
(15 km) (10 km)
Encapsulation type eSFP eSFP
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode
Working wavelength range Tx: 1260 to 1360 Tx: 1480 to 1500

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360
Mean launched optical power -15 to -8 -15 to -8

(dBm)
Receiving sensitivity (dBm) -32 -32
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8
Minimum extinction ratio 8.5 8.5

(dB)
Optical module code 34060363 34060364
Usage description Used together.
NOTE
A single-fiber bidirectional module receives and transmits optical signals using different working
wavelength ranges over a single optical fiber. The receiving and transmitting working wavelength ranges
of single-fiber bidirectional modules at both ends must match. As shown in Table 9-2, 34060363 and
34060364 are used together.
FE Optical Module (industry)
Table 9-3 Technical specifications of the FE optical interface
Item Specification

type

Equipment
Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

optical power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)
9.3 GE Optical Module

FE/GE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the FE/GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Specification
1000BASE-BX40-U 1000BASE-BX40-D
(40 km) (40 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360
Mean launched optical power -3 to 2 -3 to 2

(dBm)

Equipment
Item Specification
Minimum extinction ratio 8 8

(dB)
NOTE
GE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 9-5 Technical specifications of the GE optical interface (two-fiber bidirectional)
Item Specification
Optical LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface

interface type
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-
SX LX VX ZX CWDM
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km)
Encapsulatio eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

n type
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working 770 to 860 1270 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580 For details,
wavelength see
range (nm) wavelength
allocation of
1000BASE-
CWDM
optical
interfaces
and related
optical
module code.
Mean -9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5

launched
optical power
(dBm)

Equipment
Item Specification
Receiving -17 -19 -23 -23 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2
extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical 34060286 34060473 S4016954 34060360 For details,

module code see
wavelength
allocation of
1000BASE-
CWDM
optical
interfaces
and related
optical
module code.
Table 9-6 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code
SN Optical Wavelength (nm) SN Optical Wavelength (nm)

module code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Specification
Optical LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface

interface type
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-
BX10-U BX10-D BX40-U BX40-D BX BX
(10 km) (10 km) (40 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km)

Equipment
Item Specification
Encapsulation eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

type
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to
wavelength 1360 1500 1360 1500 1360 1500
range (nm) Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1500 1360 1500 1360 1500 1360
Mean -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to 5 -3 to 5 -2 to 4 -2 to 4
launched
optical power
(dBm)
Receiving -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23 -26 -26

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 6 6 6 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical 34060470 34060475 34060539 34060540 34060595 34060596

module code
Usage Used together. Used together. Used together.

description
NOTE
34060475 are used together, 34060595 and 34060596 are used together, and 34060539 and 34060540 are
used together.
GE Optical Module (industry)
Item Specification
Optical interface type LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface

Equipment
Item Specification
1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX

(10 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)
Mean launched optical -11 to -3 -5 to 3 -2 to 5

power (dBm)
Receiving sensitivity –19 –23 –23

(dBm)
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 9 9 9
ratio (dB)
Optical module code 34060290 34060320 34060324
Item Specification
(10 km) (10 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360

(dBm)
Receiving sensitivity (dBm) -19.5 -19.5

(dB)

Equipment
Item Specification
NOTE
9.4 10GE Optical Module

10GE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 9-10 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface
Item Specification

interface
type 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE
(10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (CWDM) (DWDM) (DWDM)
(70 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Encapsulat XFP XFP XFP XFP TXFP XFP

ion type
Fiber type Single- Single- Single- Single- Single- Single-

mode mode mode mode mode mode
Working 1310 1550 1550 For details, 1529.163 For details,

wavelengt see to see
h range wavelengt 1560.606 wavelengt
(nm) h (waveleng h
allocation th tunable) allocation
of 10GE of 10GE
(CWDM) (DWDM)
optical optical
interfaces interfaces
and related and related
optical optical
module module
code. code.
Mean -6 to -1 -1 to 2 0 to 4 0 to 4 -1 to 2 -1 to 3
launched
optical
power
(dBm)

Equipment
Item Specification
Receiving -14.4 -15 -24 -24 -16 -24

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0.5 -1 -7 -9 0 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 8.2 9 8 10.5 8.2

extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical S4015772 S4015776 S4015794 For details, 34060568 For details,

module see see
code wavelengt wavelengt
h h
allocation allocation
of 10GE of 10GE
(CWDM) (DWDM)
optical optical
optical optical
module module
code. code.
Table 9-11 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical
module code
SN Optical Wavelength SN Optical Wavelength (nm)

module code (nm) module
code
1 34060547 1471 5 34060551 1551
2 34060548 1491 6 34060552 1571
3 34060549 1511 7 34060553 1591
4 34060550 1531 8 34060554 1611

Equipment
Table 9-12 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-DWDM optical interfaces and related optical
module code

code
1 34060532 1529.55 9 34060531 1548.51
2 34060515 1530.33 10 34060514 1549.32
3 34060504 1531.12 11 34060502 1550.12
4 34060503 1531.90 12 34060501 1550.92
5 34060534 1532.68 13 34060533 1551.72
6 34060628 1533.47 14 34060625 1552.52
7 34060627 1534.25 15 34060624 1553.33
8 34060626 1535.04 16 34060623 1554.13
9.5 Electrical Module

FE Electrical Module (commercial)
Table 9-13 Technical specifications of the FE electrical interface
Item Specification
Interface rate 100 Mbit/s
Encapsulation type SFP
RJ-45 electrical interface Compliance with IEEE 802.3

specification
Electrical module code 34100101
GE Electrical Module (commercial)
Table 9-14 Technical specifications of the GE electrical interface
Item Specification
Interface rate 1000 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000

Mbit/s
Encapsulation type SFP SFP

Equipment
Item Specification
RJ-45 electrical interface Compliance with IEEE 802.3 Compliance with IEEE 802.3
specification
Electrical module code 34100080 34100052

Equipment
Hardware Description 10 Cables
10 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various optical fibers and cables used on the equipment.
10.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables

This section describes power supply cables and ground cables used on the equipment.
10.2 Management Cables

On an ATN device, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
10.3 Alarm Input/Output Cables

On ATN devices, the RJ-45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external
equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
10.4 Clock Cables

The clock cables used on ATN devices include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock
cables.
10.5 Service Cables

The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and 120-ohm 16 x E1
cables, xDSL cables.
10.6 Optical Fibers

On an ATN device, optical fibers are used to input and output Ethernet service signals.

Equipment
10.1 Power Supply Cables and Ground Cables

This section describes power supply cables and ground cables used on the equipment.
10.1.1 -48 V Power Supply Cables

ATN devices use DC power cables to connect to external power supplies.
Power cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of DC connectors, single
cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 10-1 shows the appearance of the power cable intended
for a 1 U chassis. Table 10-1 provides the technical specifications of the power cable for a 1 U
chassis. Figure 10-2 shows the appearance of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis. Table
10-2 provides the technical specifications of the power cable for a 2 U chassis.
Figure 10-1 Appearance of the power cable intended for a 1 U chassis
Single cord end

terminal
1U DC connector Power cable
Figure 10-2 Appearance of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis
screwdriver
-48V cable
(blue)
0 V cable
(black)
2 U DC connector

Equipment
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the power cable intended for a 1 U chassis
Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
2.5 mm2 Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/ Bare crimp terminal, single cord end
(0.004 in.2) 750V, H07Z, K, 2.5 mm2(0.004 terminal, 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2), 12.5 A, tin
power cable in.2), blue/black green, fire plating, 8 mm(0.31 in.) deep, blue
and terminal resistant cable with low smoke
and no halogen
Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the power cable intended for a 2 U chassis
Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
4 mm2 (0.006 Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/ Bare crimp terminal, single cord end
in.2) power 750V, H07Z, K, 4 mm2(0.006 terminal, 4 mm2(0.006 in.2), 20 A, tin
cable and in.2), blue/black green, fire plating, 10 mm(0.39 in.) deep, gray
terminal resistant cable with low smoke
and no halogen
10.1.2 AC Power Cables

ATN devices input external power supplies through AC power cables.
Appearance
Figure 10-3 shows an AC input power cable of an ATN device.
Figure 10-3 Appearance of the AC input power cable

Equipment
Technical Specifications
Cable Item Description
Power cable for Cable type (PI Straight Male)-(227IEC53-1.0^2(3C))-

inputting the mains (C13 Straight Female)
Technical International AC 250 V 10 A-3.00 m-3 x 1.0

specifications of the mm2-Black
cable
Fireproof class CM
Note 1: A power cable is named in the format of "Connector 1 Type-Cable Material Type-
Connector 2 Type".
Note 2: The specifications of power cables for inputting the mains vary in different countries
or regions. In this document, the AC power cables complying with international standards are
considered as examples.
10.1.3 PGND Cables

PGND cables are used to ground the ATN device.
PGND cables are made of wires and OT terminals. Figure 10-4 shows the appearance of a PGND
cable. The technical specifications of the PGND cable are listed in Table 10-3.
Figure 10-4 Appearance of the PGND cable
Table 10-3 Technical specifications of the PGND cable
Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter
Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/750 V, H07Z, General terminal, OT, 6 mm2(0.009 in.2), tin
K, 4 mm2(0.006 in.2), yellow green, fire plating, pre-insulated ring terminal,
resistant cable with low smoke and no 12-10AWG, yellow
halogen

Equipment
10.2 Management Cables

On an ATN device, Ethernet cables are used to input and output NM signals.
The management cables for ATN devices include Ethernet cables.
Ethernet cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables, and are used for
communication between the equipment and the NMS computer. The NM interface on the
equipment is adaptive to a straight-through cable or a crossover cable.
Figure 10-5 shows an RJ45 connector used at the end of the Ethernet cable.
When the cable is connected to the ETH/OAM interface, the pin assignment of the RJ45
connector is as listed in Table 10-4.
Table 10-5 lists the technical specifications of the Ethernet cable.
Figure 10-5 RJ45 connector

PIN#8
PIN#1
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (ETH/OAM)
Connecto Color Relation Usage

r Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Transmit positive of the NM interface
2 Orange Transmit negative of the NM interface
3 White-green Twisted pair Receive positive of the NM interface
6 Green Receive negative of the NM interface
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding end of the console interface
5 White-blue Receive end of the console interface
7 White-brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Transmit end of the console interface

Equipment
Table 10-5 Technical specifications of the Ethernet cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8-Pin, Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm,Category 5e UTP, 0.51 mm(0.0200 in.),
24AWG, 8 Cores, PANTONE 430U
Number of cores Eight
10.3 Alarm Input/Output Cables

On ATN devices, the RJ-45 connectors are used to input the alarm signals from the external
equipment and output the local alarm signals to the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
At one end of the alarm input/output cable, the RJ-45 connector is used to connect to the ALMI/
O interface on the equipment; at the other end, a connector (made as required on site) is used to
connect to the external equipment or the equipment that monitors all the alarms.
Structure
Figure 10-6 shows the structure of the alarm input/output cable.
Figure 10-6 Structure of the alarm input/output cable

RJ-45 Connector
Main label
8 W
X1
Pin Assignment
Table 10-6 lists the pin assignment of the alarm input/output alarm cable connector.

Equipment
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the alarm input/output cable connector
Connector Color Relation Description

Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Alarm input 1
2 Orange Ground for alarm input 1
3 White-green Twisted pair Alarm input 2
6 Green Ground for alarm input 2
4 Blue Twisted pair Alarm input 3
5 White-blue Ground for alarm input 3
7 White- brown Twisted pair Alarm output positive
8 Brown Alarm output negative
Table 10-7 lists the technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable.
Table 10-7 Technical specifications of the alarm input/output cable
Item Specification
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 100 ohm, Category 5e, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 Cores, 4
Pairs, PANTONE 430U
10.4 Clock Cables

The clock cables used on ATN devices include external clock cables and 120-to-75-ohm clock
cables.
10.4.1 External Clock Cables

On the ATN device, the external clock cables with RJ45 connectors are used to input and output
the external clock or time signals.
The external clock cables can be connected to the CLK, and TOD interfaces on an ATN device.
Structure
Figure 10-7 shows the structure of the RJ45 connector used on the external clock cable.

Equipment
Figure 10-7 Structure of the RJ45 Connector

PIN#8
PIN#1
Pin Assignment
The external clock cables must be made on the equipment installation site. When the CLK
interfaces are used as external clock interfaces, the pin assignment of the RJ45 connector is as
listed in Table 10-8; when the TOD interfaces are used as external time interfaces, the pin
assignment of the RJ45 connector is as listed in Table 10-9.
Table 10-8 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external clock mode)
Connector Color Relation Description

Pin
1 White-orange Twisted pair Receive negative of CLK
2 Orange Receive positive of CLK
3 White-green Twisted pair Unspecified
6 Green Unspecified
4 Blue Twisted pair Transmit negative of CLK
5 White-blue Transmit positive of CLK
7 White- brown Twisted pair Unspecified
8 Brown Unspecified
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector (external time mode)
Connecto Color Relation Description

r Pin
1PPS + Time DCLS Mode
Information Mode
1 White-orange Twisted pair Unspecified Unspecified
2 Orange Unspecified Unspecified
3 White-green Twisted pair Negative of 1PPS Negative of DCLS

signals signals

Equipment
Connecto Color Relation Description

r Pin
1PPS + Time DCLS Mode
Information Mode
6 Green Positive of 1PPS Positive of DCLS

signals signals
4 Blue Twisted pair Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
5 White-blue Grounding terminal Grounding terminal
7 White-brown Twisted pair Negative of time Unspecified

information
8 Brown Positive of time Unspecified

information
Table 10-10 and Table 10-11 lists the technical specifications of the external clock cable.
Table 10-10 Technical specifications of the external shielded clock cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model

Connector,24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cabl
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category 5e,FTP,0.52mm(0.0205 in.),

24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores
Table 10-11 Technical specifications of the external non-shielded clock cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8Pin,Non-Shielded,Crystal Plug
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,,Category 5e UTP,0.51mm(0.0200 in.),

24AWG,8Cores,PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores
10.4.2 Clock Bridging Cables

On an ATN device, the 120-to-75-ohm clock cable is used as the clock bridging cables.

Equipment
Structure
Figure 10-8 shows the structure of the 120-to-75-ohm clock bridging cables.
Figure 10-8 Structure of the clock bridging cables

120-ohm or 75-
ohm conversion
connector Label
Heat-shrink tube
RJ-45 Main W1
View A connector label Heat-shrink tube
8 A
W5 Heat-shrink tube W2
1
W3
X1
W4
30 m
Pin Assignment
Table 10-12 lists the pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector.
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of the clock bridging cable connector
120-Ohm Cable 75-Ohm Cable
Connector Pin Color Relation Core No.
X1.1 Orange Twisted pair W1
X1.2 White
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair W2
X1.5 White
X1.3 Green Twisted pair W3
X1.6 White
X1.7 White Twisted pair W4
X1.8 Brown
Table 10-13 lists the technical specifications of the clock bridging cables.

Equipment
Table 10-13 Technical specifications of the clock bridging cables
Item Specification
Cable Single Cable, 120 ohm To 75 ohm Clock Cable, 30 m, MP8-II,

120CC4P0.4P430U(S)+4*SYV75-2/0.34(S)
Connector X1 Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Crystal Model Connector

type
120-ohm cable Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), 26AWG, 4Pairs,
type Pantone 430U
75-ohm cable Coaxial Cable, SYV-75-2-2(4.0Z)-1/0.34 mm, OD3.9 mm(0.15 in.),

type Double-Layer Copper Braid Shielded
10.5 Service Cables

The service cables include Ethernet cables, 75-ohm 16 x E1 cables, and 120-ohm 16 x E1
cables, xDSL cables.
10.5.1 Ethernet Cables

On an ATN device, Ethernet cables are used to input and output Ethernet service signals.
Ethernet cables are also referred to as network cables and can be classified into straight-through
cables and crossover cables according to the connection sequence of the copper cores in the
cables.
A network cable with a shield layer is a shielded cable and that without a shield layer is a non-
shielded cable.
The Ethernet service interfaces on the equipment are adaptive to the straight-through cables and
crossover cables. Hence, you can connect either type of the network cables to the Ethernet service
interfaces as required.
Ethernet cables need to be made on site.
Structure
Figure 10-9 shows the appearance of the shield layer.

Equipment
Figure 10-9 Appearance of the shield layer
Figure 10-10 shows the appearance of the non-shielded cable.
Figure 10-10 Appearance of the non-shielded cable
RJ45 connectors are used at both ends of a network cable. Figure 10-11 shows an RJ45 connector
and Figure 10-12 shows the structure of the network cable.
Figure 10-11 RJ45 connector

PIN#8
PIN#1

Equipment
Figure 10-12 Structure of the network cable

RJ-45 network interface
Label 1 Main label Label 2
connector
W 8
8
1 1
X1 X2
NOTE
For a crossover cable, pins 1 and 2 of the RJ45 connector at one end must be cross-connected to pins 3 and
6 of the RJ45 connector at the other end respectively.
Pin Assignment
Table 10-14 and Table 10-15 list the pin assignment of the network cable connector.
Table 10-14 Pin assignment of the straight-through cable connector
straight-through Cable
Connector X1 Pin Connector X2 Pin Color Relationship
X1.1 X2.1 White-orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White-green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of the crossover cable connector
Crossover Cable for FE Interface Crossover Cable for GE Interface
Connecto Connect Color Relation Connector Connect Color Relation

r X1 Pin or X2 Pin ship X1 Pin or X2 Pin ship
X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted X1.1 X2.3 White-orange Twisted

pair pair
X1.2 X2.6 Orange X1.2 X2.6 Orange

Equipment
Crossover Cable for FE Interface Crossover Cable for GE Interface
Connecto Connect Color Relation Connector Connect Color Relation

r X1 Pin or X2 Pin ship X1 Pin or X2 Pin ship
X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted X1.3 X2.1 White-green Twisted

pair pair
X1.6 X2.2 Green X1.6 X2.2 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted X1.4 X2.7 Blue Twisted

pair pair
X1.5 X2.5 White-blue X1.5 X2.8 White-blue
X1.7 X2.7 White-brown Twisted X1.7 X2.4 White-brown Twisted

pair pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown X1.8 X2.5 Brown
Table 10-16 lists the technical specifications of the shielded cable.
Table 10-16 Technical specifications of the shielded cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8PIN,Shielded,Crystal Model

X1/X2 Connector,24-26AWG,Leads Single Solide Cabl
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,Category 5e,FTP,0.52mm(0.0205 in.),

24AWG,8Cores,4Pairs,PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores
Table 10-17 lists the technical specifications of the non-shielded cable.
Table 10-17 Technical specifications of the non-shielded cable
Item Specification
Connector Network Interface Connector,8-Bit 8Pin,Non-Shielded,Crystal Plug

X1/X2
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable,100ohm,,Category 5e UTP,0.51mm(0.0200 in.),

24AWG,8Cores,PANTONE 430U
Number of Eight
cores

Equipment
10.5.2 75-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables

The 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals.
Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 75-ohm 8 x E1 electrical interface
board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The
connector should be made according to the on-site requirements.
Structure
Figure 10-13 shows the structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable.
Figure 10-13 Structure of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable

Cable connector-
D type-44PIN-male
Pos.44 A-A
Pos.1
A
Main label
Pin Assignment
Table 10-18 lists the pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable connector.
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable connector
Connecto Cable Remarks Connecto Cable Remarks

r Pin r Pin
Core Serial No. Core Serial No.
38 Ring 1 R0 34 Ring 9 R4
23 Tip 19 Tip
37 Ring 3 R1 33 Ring 11 R5
22 Tip 18 Tip
36 Ring 5 R2 32 Ring 13 R6
21 Tip 17 Tip
35 Ring 7 R3 31 Ring 15 R7

Equipment

r Pin r Pin
20 Tip 16 Tip
15 Ring 2 T0 11 Ring 10 T4
30 Tip 26 Tip
14 Ring 4 T1 10 Ring 12 T5
29 Tip 25 Tip
13 Ring 6 T2 9 Ring 14 T6
28 Tip 24 Tip
12 Ring 8 T3 8 Ring 16 T7
27 Tip 7 Tip
Shell External braid shield layer
Table 10-19 Technical specifications of the 75-ohm 8 x E1 cable
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 75-ohm, 8E1, 2.2 mm, D44M-I,

SYFVZP75-1.2/0.25*16(S)-I, -45 deg
Trunk Cable, 75-ohm, 8E1, 2.2 mm, D44M-I,
SYFVZP75-1.2/0.25*16(S)-I, +45 deg
Connector Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male
Cable type Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-LC 75-1-1*16, 75–ohm, 13.10 mm, 1.2
mm, 0.254 mm, Pantone Warm Gray 1U
Fireproof class CM
Number of cores 16
Cover diameter- 13.1 mm - 1.2 mm - 0.254 mm

insulation diameter-
conductor diameter
10.5.3 120-Ohm 8 x E1 Cables

The 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable is used to input and output E1 signals.

Equipment
Use the DB44 connector at one end to connect the cable to the 120-ohm E1 electrical interface
board. Use a connector to connect the other end to the DDF. The connector should be made
according to the on-site requirements.
Structure
Figure 10-14 shows the appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable and Figure 10-15 shows the
structure of the cable.
Figure 10-14 Appearance of the 120-ohm 8 x E1 cable

Cable connector-
A-A D type-44PIN-male
Pos.1
Pos.44
A
Lable 1 Main lable

Lable 2
W1
X
W2
Pin assignment

Equipment
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable connector
Connector Pin Cable Remarks Connector Pin Cable Remarks
Core Core
15 Blue R0 38 Blue T0
30 White 23 White
14 Orange R1 37 Orange T1
29 White 22 White
13 Green R2 36 Green T2
28 White 21 White
12 Brown R3 35 Brown T3
27 White 20 White
11 Grey R4 34 Grey T4
26 White 19 White
10 Blue R5 33 Blue T5
25 Red 18 Red
9 Orange R6 32 Orange T6
24 Red 17 Red
8 Green R7 31 Green T7
7 Red 16 Red
Shell External braid shield layer Shell External braid shield layer
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 120-ohm, 8E1, 0.4 mm, D44M-I,

2*120CC8P0.4P430U(S), -45deg
Trunk Cable, 120-ohm, 8E1, 0.4 mm, D44M-I,
2*120CC8P0.4P430U(S), 45deg
Connector Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male
Cable type Communication cable-120 ohm-SEYVP-24AWG-16 core-

PANTONE 430U

Equipment
Item Specification
Number of cores 16 twisted pairs
Inner conductor 0.4 mm(0.02 in.)

diameter
Fireproof class CM
10.5.4 75-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables

On an ATN device, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 75-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of the 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 75-ohm
E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the digital distribution frame
(DDF). Make the connector as required on site.
NOTE
The 75-ohm 16 x E1 cable of other types of ATN equipment cannot be used for the ATN 910I. Otherwise,
the device cannot correctly identify the impedance.
Structure

Equipment
Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pos .1
Pin Assignment

r Pin r Pin
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring

Equipment

r Pin r Pin
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Tip 17 R8 41 Tip 18 T8
18 Ring 42 Ring
19 Tip 19 R9 43 Tip 20 T9
20 Ring 44 Ring
21 Tip 21 R10 45 Tip 22 T10
22 Ring 46 Ring
23 Tip 23 R11 47 Tip 24 T11
24 Ring 48 Ring
49 Tip 25 R12 73 Tip 26 T12
50 Ring 74 Ring
51 Tip 27 R13 75 Tip 28 T13
52 Ring 76 Ring
53 Tip 29 R14 77 Tip 30 T14
54 Ring 78 Ring
55 Tip 31 R15 79 Tip 32 T15
56 Ring 80 Ring
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 75ohm, 16E1, 1.6mm,Anea 96F-

I,SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S), +45deg

Equipment
Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And

Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 28-30 AWG Solid Wire, 1 A
Cable type Coaxial Cable, SYFVZP-MC 75-1-1*32, 75 ohm, 12.40 mm(0.49

in.), 1.1 mm(0.04 in.), 0.26 mm(0.01 in.), Pantone Warm Gray 1U,
Only for OEM
Diameter of the shield 12.4 mm(0.49 in.) - 1.6 mm(0.06 in.) - 0.26 mm(0.01 in.)
layer - diameter of the
internal insulation
layer - diameter of the
internal conductor
Number of cores 32
Available length 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m
16.40 ft.,32.80 ft.,49.21 ft.,65.62 ft.,82.02 ft.,98.42 ft.,114.83 ft.,
131.23 ft.147.64 ft.,164.04 ft.
10.5.5 120-Ohm 16 x E1 Cables

On an ATN device, Anea96 connectors are used to input and output 120-ohm E1 signals.
At one end of the a 120-ohm 16 x E1 cable, the Anea96 connector is used to connect the 120-
ohm E1 electrical interface on the board; the other end is connected to the DDF. Make the
connector as required on site.
Structure

Equipment
Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
Pos .1
Pin assignment

r Pin r Pin
Core Bundle Core Bundle
1 White Blue R0 25 White Blue T0
2 Blue 26 Orange
3 White R1 27 White T1
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White R2 29 Red T2
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red R3 31 Red T3
8 Orange 32 Green
9 Red R4 33 Red T4
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black R5 35 Black T5
12 Blue 36 Orange

Equipment

r Pin r Pin
Core Bundle Core Bundle
14 Green 38 Brown
15 Black R7 39 Yellow T7
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Orange R8 41 White Orange T8
18 Blue 42 Orange
19 White R9 43 White T9
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White R10 45 Red T10
22 Grey 46 Blue
23 Red R11 47 Red T11
24 Orange 48 Green
49 Red R12 73 Red T12
50 Brown 74 Grey
52 Blue 76 Orange
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black R15 79 Yellow T15
56 Grey 80 Blue
Item Specification
Cable Trunk Cable, 120 ohm, 16E1, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), Anea 96F,
120CC32P0.4P430U(S), +45deg

Equipment
Item Specification
Connector Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN, Suite Of Female Connector And

Shielding Case, IDC Type, For 24-26 AWG Solid Wire - 1 A
Cable type Twisted-Pair Cable, 120 ohm, SEYVP, 0.4 mm(0.02 in.), 26AWG,
32Pairs, Pantone 430U
Core diameter of the 0.4 mm(0.02 in.)

inner conductor
Number of cores 32 twisted pairs
10.5.6 xDSL Cables

On an ATN devices, the telephone wires with RJ-11/RJ-45 connectors are used to input and
output ADSL and G.SHDSL service signals.
The connectors at both ends of the cable applicable to the AND1SHD4, and AND1SHD4I are
RJ-11 connectors.
The connectors at both ends of the cable applicable to the AND1AVD8A are RJ-45 connectors.
Structure
Figure 10-20 shows the structure of the telephone wire used as an xDSL cable.
Figure 10-20 Structure of the telephone wire

1 Main label
6 W 6
1 1
X1 X2
15 m
1. Telephone wire RJ-11 crystal connector
1 Main label
8 W 8
1 1
X1 X2
15 m
1. Telephone wire RJ-45 crystal connector

Equipment
Pin Assignment
Table 10-26 lists the pin assignment of the ADSL cable connector and Table 10-27 lists the pin
assignment of the G.SHDSL cable connector.
Table 10-26 Pin assignment of the ADSL cable connector (RJ-45)
Connector X1 Connector X2 Description
X1.1 X2.1 Unspecified
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
X1.5 X2.5 Tip
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the G.SHDSL cable connector
Connector X1 Connector X2 Description
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
Table 10-28 lists the technical specifications of the xDSL cable (telephone wire).

Equipment
Table 10-28 Technical specifications of the xDSL cable
Item Specification
RJ-11 Connector X1/ Network Interface Connector, 6-Bit 4PIN, Crystal Model
X2 Connector, Matching 26-28AWG
RJ-45 Connector X1/ Network Interface Connector, 8-Bit 8PIN, Shielded, Crystal Model
X2 Connector
Cable Electronic and Power Cable, 150 V,UL20251, 28AWG, Black, 1 A,

2 Cores Telephone Cable
Number of cores 2
10.6 Optical Fibers

On an ATN device, optical fibers are used to input and output Ethernet service signals.
Indoor optical fibers include single-mode optical fibers and multi-mode optical fibers. The
appearances of a single-mode optical fiber and a multi-mode optical fiber are the same, but their
colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is
orange.
Figure 10-21 shows the appearance of a single-mode optical fiber.
Figure 10-21 Appearance of a single-mode optical fiber with LC/PC connectors
LC/PC connectors are used at both ends of the optical fiber shown in Figure 10-21. For an optical
fiber that connects an optical port on an ATN device to an optical port of another type on the

Equipment
peer device, an LC/PC connector is used at one end and a connector of another type is used at
the other end. Table 10-29 lists the common optical connectors.
Table 10-29 Common optical connectors
Appearance Type Description
SC/PC connector Plug-in square fiber connector/

protruding polished
FC/PC connector Round fiber connector/protruding

polished
ST/PC connector Square fiber connector/protruding

polished

Equipment
Hardware Description 11 Equipment Support
11 Equipment Support
About This Chapter
ATN devices can work with various equipment to implement various applications.
11.1 Cabinet Support

This section provides common cabinets that can house ATN devices.
11.2 Power Distribution Equipment

This section introduces equipment that supplies power to ATN devices.
11.3 Heater
The ATN 910I-TC DC operates at a temperature that ranges from -40ºC to 65ºC. When the
temperature falls below -20ºC, the heater starts working.

Equipment
11.1 Cabinet Support

This section provides common cabinets that can house ATN devices.
11.1.1 APM30H Outdoor Cabinet

The APM30H outdoor cabinet supports IP55 protection rating and can be used outdoors.
The APM30H is an outdoor cabinet with heat exchangers. It supports AC power supply and DC
power distribution, and can provide a 7 U installation space for user devices. Figure 11-1 and
Figure 11-2 show the appearance and internal structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet.
Figure 11-1 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet

Equipment
Figure 11-2 Internal structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
7U
Table 11-1 lists the technical specifications of the APM30H outdoor cabinet.
Table 11-1 Technical specifications of the APM30H outdoor cabinet
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm
Available installation 7 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

space
Allowable internal heat ≤ 700 W

consumption
Protection rating IP55
11.1.2 IMB Network Cabinet

The IMB network cabinet supports the IP31 protection rating, and can be wall mounted indoors,
in the corridor, and in the weak current well.
A small-sized IMB network cabinet has a compact structure and occupies only a little installation
space. In addition, it can be installed on an uneven wall with an undulation smaller than 10 mm,
so it has low requirements on site selection.
The IMB network cabinet provides a 3 U installation space for user devices. The internal 2 U
installation space is for an ATN device and the external 1 U installation space is for a power
supply device. Figure 11-3 and Figure 11-4 show the appearance and structure of an IMB
network cabinet.

Equipment
Figure 11-3 Appearance of an IMB network cabinet
Figure 11-4 Internal structure of an IMB network cabinet
Table 11-2 lists the technical specifications of the IMB network cabinet.
Table 11-2 Technical specifications of the IMB network cabinet
Item Specifications
Available installation space 3 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
Allowable internal heat ≤ 300 W

consumption

Equipment
Item Specifications
Protection rating IP31
11.1.3 19-inch Open Rack

19-inch open racks apply to Class-A indoor installation environment.
A 19-inch open rack provides a 45 U installation space for user devices. Figure 11-5 shows the
appearance of a 19-inch open rack.
Figure 11-5 Appearance of a 19-inch open rack
Table 11-3 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch open rack.
Table 11-3 Technical specifications of the 19-inch open rack
Item Specifications
Dimensions (H x W x D) 2,200 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm
Available installation space 45 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Equipment
11.1.4 N63E Cabinet

N63E-22 cabinet apply to Class-A indoor installation environment.
The N63E-22 cabinet has a height of 2.2 m. Figure 11-6 shows the appearance of a N63E-22
cabinet.
Figure 11-6 Appearance of a N63E-22 cabinet

Equipment
Table 11-4 lists the technical specifications of the N63E-22 cabinet.
Table 11-4 Technical specifications of the N63E-22 cabinet
Item Specifications
Standard compliance ETSI cabinet (21-inch): ETSI 300 119-3
Weight (empty cabinet) 45 kg
Dimensions (W x D x H) 600 mm x 300 mm x 2200 mm
Distance between mounting 1 SU = 25 mm. (SU: Standard U.)

bar holes
Available space 83 SU
Fixing centers 515 mm
11.2 Power Distribution Equipment

This section introduces equipment that supplies power to ATN devices.
11.2.1 Power Distribution

This section describes power distribution for ATN devices in AC and DC scenarios.
DC Scenario
The rated voltage and current of ATN 910 are -48 V/-60 V DC and 4 A, respectively.
The rated voltage and current of an ATN 910I DC device are -48 V/-60 V DC and 1.5 A,
respectively.
NOTE
An ATN 910I AC device using AC power supplies cannot be used in the DC scenario.
The rated voltage and current of ATN 910B are -48 V/-60 V DC and 4 A, respectively.
The rated voltage and current of ATN 950B are -48 V/-60 V DC and 8 A, respectively.
In DC scenarios, an ATN device can be directly used under the rated voltage of -48 V/-60 V DC
or used with a 27S48D power system under the rated voltage of +24 V DC. Figure 11-7 and
Figure 11-8 show the power distribution for an ATN device.
Figure 11-7 Power distribution for an ATN device under the voltage of -48 V/-60 V DC
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
ATN
-48 V DC/-60 V DC

Equipment
NOTE
For the capacity of circuit breakers or fuses on an ATN device, refer to the Quick Installation Guide of the
ATN device.
Figure 11-8 Power distribution for an ATN device under the voltage of +24 V DC
-48 V DC
+24 V DC
27S48D -48 V DC ATN
+24 V DC
AC Scenario
The input AC voltage of An ATN 910I AC device is from 100 V to 240 V AC and the rated
current is 0.6 A.An ATN 910I AC device can be directly used in AC scenarios. Figure 11-9
shows the power distribution for an ATN 910I AC device.
Figure 11-9 AC power distribution
220 V AC ATN
When using AC power supplies, the ATN DC device can be used with an EPS30-4815AF power
system. Figure 11-10 shows the power distribution for an ATN DC device.
Figure 11-10 AC power distribution

-48 V DC
220 V AC EPS30-4815AF -48 V DC ATN
-48V DC
Lead-acid
battery
11.2.2 EPS30-4815AF Power System

The EPS30-4815AF external power system converts input 220 V AC power to -53.5 V DC power
and supplies power to an ATN device. When the 220 V AC input power supply fails, the
EPS30-4815AF automatically supplies to the ATN device the backup power of storage batteries.
An EPS30-4815AF power system consists of a rectifier module, monitoring module, and AC/
DC power distribution frame.

Equipment
Appearance
Figure 11-11 and Table 11-5 show the appearance and structure of an EPS30-4815AF,
respectively.
Figure 11-11 Appearance of an EPS30-4815AF
NOTICE
Interfaces on the monitoring module are reserved temporarily. Do not use these interfaces.
Otherwise, the power system may be reset or damaged.
Table 11-5 Structure of an EPS30-4815AF
Component Description
Rectifier module Converts AC power to DC power. One or two rectifier modules

can be configured in an EPS30-4815AF power system.
Monitoring module Detects the status of the power system and storage batteries. Two
RS232/RS485 communication interfaces and one DB50
interface are reserved on the monitoring module.
AC/DC power distribution Provides AC power input interface, load interfaces, storage
frame battery interface, and replaceable fuses.

Equipment
Indicators
Indicators for the rectifier and monitoring modules are present on the front panel of the
EPS30-4815AF. Table 11-6 and Table 11-7 list the indications of indicators for the rectifier
and monitoring modules respectively.
Table 11-6 Indicators for the rectifier modules
Indicator Indication Color Normal Abnormal Cause of Exception

State State
RUN Running Green On Off The rectifier modules are running

indicator normally.
ALM Protection Yellow Off On A fault that can be rectified occurs on

indicator a rectifier module.
Blinking Communication on a rectifier module

is interrupted.
FAULT Fault Red Off On A fault that cannot be rectified occurs

indicator on a rectifier module.
Note 1: When a severe fault occurs, the indicator (red) is on and the indicators (yellow and green) are off. The
indicators (yellow and green) are on only when the indicator (red) is off.
Note 2: The indicator (yellow) is always on when communication on a rectifier module is interrupted, a rectifier
module is overheated or endures overcurrent or undercurrent, or a rectifier module is disabled.
Table 11-7 Indicators for the monitoring module
Indicat Indicatio Color Normal Abnorm Cause of Exception

or n State al State
RUN Running Green Blinking Off The monitoring module is

indicator regularly running abnormally.
Fast Abnormal communication

blinking
ALM Alarm Red Off On The EPS30-4815AF reports an

indicator alarm.
Interfaces
Table 11-8 lists types and usage of the interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF.

Equipment
Table 11-8 Interfaces on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF
Interface Numb Interface Description Remarks

Name er of Type
Interfa
ces
AC INPUT 1 - 220 V AC power input -

interface
RS232/RS485 2 RJ-45 RS232/RS485 Reserved interfaces

communication interfaces.
The monitoring module
communicates with the
equipment, reports alarms,
and implements remote
control through these
interfaces.
The interface on the left is the
active interface and the
interface on the right is the
standby interface. The active
and standby interfaces cannot
be used at the same time.
COM 1 DB50 The monitoring module is Reserved interface

connected to various sensors
through the COM interface.
LOAD1 1 - Output interface for load 1 LOAD1 and LOAD2 provide DC

power for two PIUs. For how to
LOAD2 1 - Output interface for load 2 connect the load interfaces to the
BATT 1 - Interface for connecting to the PIUs, see the Installation Guide.
storage batteries The pins marked with + and - are
connected to the 48V+ and 48V-
poles of the cable connector
respectively.
Table 11-9 lists the relationships of
the load output interfaces, interface
for connecting to the storage
batteries, and fuses.
Output branch fuses

There are three replaceable fuses on the front panel of the EPS30-4815AF. The fuses disable/
enable the load and storage batteries, and provide overload and short-circuit protection for the
load and storage batteries.

Equipment
Table 11-9 Relationships of the load output interfaces, interface for connecting to the storage
batteries, and fuses
Output Branch Fuse Load Branch
FU-1 (10 A) LOAD1 (10 A)
FU-2 (20 A) LOAD2 (20 A)
FU-BT (20 A) BATT (20 A)
DIP Switch
There is a DIP switch on the monitoring module of the EPS30-4815AF. Figure 11-12 shows
the default setting and location of the DIP switch.
Figure 11-12 Default setting and location of the DIP switch
NOTICE
Do not change the default setting of the DIP switch. Otherwise, the EPS30-4815AF is affected.
The DIP switch indicates eight bits in binary format (on: 1; off: 0). The default value of the eight
bits is 00000100. The functions of the eight bits are as follows:
l The first five bits indicate the local and remote power addresses. Bit 5 is the highest bit and
bit 1 is the lowest bit.
l Bit 6 sets the baud rate of communication between the monitoring module and equipment.
When bit 6 is 1, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s; when bit 6 is 0, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
l Bits 7 and 8 are reserved.
Table 11-10 lists the technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF.

Equipment
Table 11-10 Technical specifications of the EPS30-4815AF
Item Specification
AC input Rated input voltage 220 (90 to 280) V AC
Maximum input 10 A
current
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Battery input Rated input voltage -48 V
Capacity 40 Ah
Number of 4
batteries
DC output Rated output -53.5 V DC

voltage
Output current LOAD1: 10 A (determined by the fuse)

LOAD 2: 20 A (determined by the fuse)
Dimensions of the EPS30-4815AF 43.6 mm (H) x 482.6 mm (W) x 270 mm (D)

(mounting ears included)
Weight of the EPS30-4815AF < 10 kg
11.2.3 27S48D Power System

The 27S48D power system converts input +24 V DC power to -53.5 V DC power and supplies
power to an ATN device.
Appearance
Figure 11-13 shows the appearance of a 27S48D power system.
Figure 11-13 Appearance of a 27S48D power system
Functions
The 27S48D power system accepts power in the range of 19 V to 30 V, and outputs -53.5 V
rated voltage and 7 A rated current.
In terms of electrical performance and structure, the 27S48D power system is divided into two
independent -53.5 V/5.6 A power modules. They are separated using an output diode and

Equipment
installed in the same cabinet. Their currents are combined into a 7 A one through power
distribution, and the 7 A current is supplied to equipment. The 27S48D power system provides
functions such as short-circuit protection, overcurrent protection, output overvoltage protection,
and overheat protection.
Indicator
Table 11-11 lists the meaning of each 27S48D power indicator status.
Table 11-11 Indicator description
Indicator Color Normal State Description
RUN Green On When the module receives 24 V power, the

indicator is on and green.
STAND-BY Yellow Off When there is no output power, the indicator

is on and yellow.
ALM Red Off When protection is triggered or a fault

occurs, the indicator is on and red.
Interface
Table 11-12 lists the types and functions of 27S48D power interfaces.
Table 11-12 Description of 27S48D power interfaces
Interface Quant Description Remarks

Name ity
INPUT 2 24 V DC power input Each power module has one input

interface interface to receive power
independently.
OUTPUT 6 -48 V DC power output Two terminals are used: NEG(-)

interface and RTN(+). There are altogether
six power outputs.
ALM 1 Alarm output terminal Dry contact output: off (abnormal)

or on (normal)
Table 11-13 lists the technical specifications of the 27S48D power system.

Equipment
Table 11-13 Technical specifications of the 27S48D power system
Item Value
DC power supply Rated input voltage 24 V (19 V to 30 V) DC
Maximum input 20 A
current
DC power supply Rated output -53.5 V DC

voltage
Output current 7A
Dimensions (with mounting ears) (H x W 43.4 mm x 482.6 mm x 244 mm

x D)
Weight < 7 kg
11.2.4 HW-100-48AC14D-1 Power System

The HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system receives and converts 110 V or 220 V AC power to
-48 V DC power for an ATN device.
Appearance
Figure 11-14 shows the appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system.
Figure 11-14 Appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system

Equipment
Functions
The HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system supports AC power ranging from 90 V to 264 V, and
outputs -48 V DC power in natural heat dissipation mode. The output power is 100 W. This
power system supports protection against output overcurrent, output undervoltage, output short
circuit, and overtemperature.
Table 11-14 provides the technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system.
Table 11-14 Technical specification of the HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system
Item Specifications
AC power input Rated input voltage 100/220 V (100 V to 240 V) AC
Maximum input 2A
current
DC output Rated output -48 V DC

voltage
Rated output 100 W

power
Weight < 1 kg
Ambient temperature l -20°C (68ºF) to +40°C (122ºF) (maximum

output power: 100 W)
l -20°C (68ºF) to +50°C (122ºF) (maximum
output power: 70 W)
NOTE
Do not put the HW-100-48AC14D-1 power system on
the surface of an overheated device or close to the air
exhaust vent, ensuring the ambient temperature of the
power system is no higher than 50°C (122ºF).
11.2.5 Lead-Acid Battery

An ATN device uses valve regulated lead-acid batteries to provide backup power.
Appearance
Figure 11-15 shows the appearance of a lead-acid battery.

Equipment
Figure 11-15 Appearance of a lead-acid battery
NOTE
The appearance, dimensions, and weight of lead-acid batteries are provided only for reference and those
of the delivered batteries prevail.
Table 11-15 shows the technical specifications of the lead-acid battery.
Table 11-15 Technical specifications of the lead-acid battery
Item Specifications
Rated working voltage (four -48 V DC

batteries cascaded in a group)
Rated capacity (four batteries 40 Ah (NP38-12RFR)

cascaded in a group) 40 Ah (BPL40-12)
Float charging voltage (four -53.5 V DC

batteries cascaded in a group)
Maximum charge current (four 9.5 A (NP38-12RFR)

batteries cascaded in a group) 12 A (BPL40-12)
Operating temperature -15°C to +50°C (NP38-12RFR)

-20°C to +50°C (BPL40-12)
Weight ≤ 15 kg
11.3 Heater
The ATN 910I-TC DC operates at a temperature that ranges from -40ºC to 65ºC. When the
temperature falls below -20ºC, the heater starts working.
The dimensions of the heater (without mounting ears) are 420 mm (width) x 250 mm (depth) x
41.6 mm (height). Figure 11-16 shows the heater.

Equipment
Figure 11-16 Heater
The technical specifications of the heater are as follows:
l When the temperature in the cabinet is lower than +1ºC (with ±6ºC offset considered), the
heater starts working. When the temperature in the cabinet is higher than +15ºC (with ±3ºC
offset considered), the heater stops working.
l The rated heating power of the heater is 330 W.

Equipment
Hardware Description 12 Quick Reference
12 Quick Reference
About This Chapter
12.1 Indicators
This topic describes the names of various indicators and their indications.
12.2 Dimensions and Weight

This chapter lists the dimensions and weight of each board used for an ATN device.
12.3 Power Consumption

This chapter lists the power consumption of each board used for ATN devices.
12.4 Interface Specifications

This chapter presents the list of Interface Specifications.

Equipment
12.1 Indicators
This topic describes the names of various indicators and their indications.
Index of Indicators
For boards and their indicators, see Boards and Their Indicators.
For board status indicators, see:
l Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)

l Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)
l Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)
l Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)
l Description of the CXP Switching Status Indicator (ACTX)
l Description of the CXP Control Status Indicator (ACTC)
l Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB/PWR)
l Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)
For service port status indicators, see:
l Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)

l Description of the Ethernet Electrical Interface Connection Status Indicator (LINK)
l Description of the Ethernet Optical Interface Connection/Data Transmission Status
Indicator (L/A or LINK/ACT)
l Description of the EF8F/EG2 Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)
l Description of the CQ1B/PQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4)
For system alarm indicators, see:
l Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)

l Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)
l Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)
For combination of indicators in different start statuses on the system control board, see
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board.
Boards and Their Indicators

ATN 910 Board Name Indicator
ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, CRIT, MAJ, MIN, L/A0, L/A1,
LINK, and ACT
AND1EF8T STAT, LINK, ACT
AND1EF8F STAT, LINK0 to LINK7
AND1EG2 STAT, LINK0, LINK1, ACT0, and ACT1

Equipment
ATN 910 Board Name Indicator
AND1EG4F STAT, L/A0 to L/A3
AND1EG4T STAT
AND1MO1C STAT
AND1AVD8A/ STAT
AND1AVD8B
AND1SHD4 STAT, LINK0 to LINK3
AND1SHD4I STAT, LINK0 to LINK3
AND1ML1/ML1A STAT
AND2ML1A/ML1B STAT
AND1MD1A/MD1B STAT
ANC1PIU PWRA, PWRB
ANC1FAN FAN
ATN 950B Board Name Indicator
AND1CXPA/ STAT, PROG, SYNC, ACTX, and ACTC

AND1CXPB/
AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE
AND1EM4T STAT
AND1EM8T STAT
AND1EX1 L/A
AND1EM4F STAT, L/A0 to L/A3
AND1EM8F STAT, L/A0 to L/A7
AND2CQ1B/AND2PQ1 STAT, LOS0 to LOS3
AND1ML1/ML1A STAT
AND3ML1A/ML1B STAT
AND2MD1A/MD1B STAT
AND1PIU PWR
AND1FAN CRIT, MAJ, MIN, and FAN

Equipment
Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)

Status Indication
On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
On (orange) The interface board is not loaded with the logic.
Off l No power is input.

l The board is not running.
Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)

Status Indication
On (green) l The board software is being initialized.

l The board software is normally initialized, and the board
software is running normally.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails.

l The board software or the logic file is lost.
l Loading of the board software fails.
On for 100 ms and off for Loading of the board software is in process.
100 ms alternately (green)
On for 300 ms and off for The BIOS is guiding the upper-layer software.
300 ms alternately (green)
On for 100 ms and off for The BIOS self-check fails.

100 ms alternately (red)
Off No power is input.
Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)

Status Indication
On (green) l The clock works in free-run mode and the system clock
priority list is not set. By default, the system clock priority
list contains only internal sources.
l The clock works in locked mode and is tracing a clock source
other than the internal sources in the priority list.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,
and the PTP time and system clock are in the tracing state.

Equipment
Status Indication
On (red) l The system clock priority list is set. All the clock sources,
however, are lost except for the internal clock sources. The
clock works in holdover mode or free-run mode.
l The system clock is working in time synchronization mode,
but no synchronization source is available. The system clock
and PTP time are working in holdover or free-run mode.
Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)

This indicator is reserved for later use.
Description of the CXP Switching Status Indicator (ACTX)

Status Indication
On (green) The board is in the working switching state.
Off The board is in the protection switching state.
Description of the CXP Control Status Indicator (ACTC)

Status Indication
On (green) The board is in the working control state.
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms alternately The data of the equipment is backed up in
(green) batch.
Off The board is in the protection control state.
Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB/PWR)

Status Indication
On (green) Power is accessed.
Off l No power is accessed.

l The power supply poles are inversely connected.

Equipment
Description of the Alarm Indicator (ALM)

Status Indication
On (red) Critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
On (yellow) Major or minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)

Status Indication
On (green) The fans are working normally.
On (red) The fans are working abnormally.
Off The fans are not powered.
Description of the Service Port Transmitting/Receiving Status Indicator (ACT)

Status Indication
Blinking (orange) The data interface is transmitting or receiving data.
Off The data interface is not transmitting or receiving data.
Description of the Ethernet Electrical Interface Connection Status Indicator (LINK)

Status Indication
On (green) The physical port connection is normal.
Off The physical port connection fails.
Description of the Ethernet Optical Interface Connection/Data Transmission

Status Indicator (L/A or LINK/ACT)
Status Indication
On (green) The connection on the physical port is

normal.

Equipment
Status Indication
Blinking (orange) The connection on the physical port is

normal, and data is received or transmitted on
the port.
Off The physical connection fails.
Description of the EF8F/EG2 Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)

Status Indication
On (green) The physical connection of the port is normal.
Off The physical connection of the port is faulty.
Description of the CQ1B/PQ1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1 to LOS4)

Status Indication
On (green) The signal on the port is normal.
On (red) The signal on the port is lost.
Off The optical module is offline.
Description of the PoE Status Indicator

Status Indication
On (green) The PoE port outputs power normally.
On (red) A PoE power output alarm is generated.

The peer is a non-standard PD.
On (orange) Negotiation with the peer PD is in progress.
Off No PD is installed at the peer end and the PoE

port does not output power.
Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)

Status Indication
On (red) Critical alarms are generated in the equipment.

Equipment
Status Indication
Off No critical alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)

Status Indication
On (orange) Major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No major alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)

Status Indication
On (yellow) Minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Off No minor alarms are generated in the equipment.
Description of the Start Status Indicator Combination on the System Control Board
Table 12-1 describes the status and meaning of the start status indicator combination of the ATN
910 control board from the time when it is powered on to the time when it is working
properly.Table 12-2 describes the status and meaning of the start status indicator combination
of the ATN 950B control board from the time when it is powered on to the time when it is
working properly.
Table 12-1 Start status indicator combination
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG
1 The system control board is not powered Off Off

on.
2 The BIOS is being started. Off Green
3 The BIOS is started, and guides and loads Off Blinking (green)
the board software.
4 The upper-layer software is being Green Green

initialized.
5 The upper-layer software initialization is Green Green

complete, but the system control board is
not running.

Equipment
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG
6 The system control board is running. Green Green

NOTE
The STAT and PROG indicators provide the control board status indication as well as the DCN availability
indication. By default, after the ATN is powered on and automatically goes online in DCN mode, The
STAT and PROG indicators are both blinking green for 3s, indicating that the ATN has gone online. Then
the STAT and PROG indicators restore the control board status indication, and the status indication lasts
for 3s. After the DCN availability indication and status indication are alternately displayed for 10 minutes,
the STAT and PROG indicators no longer provide the DCN availability indication and only provide the
status indication.
Table 12-2 Start status indicator combination for ATN 950B
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG ACTC

ACTX
1 The system control board Off Off Off

is not powered on.
2 The BIOS is being started. Off Green Off
3 The BIOS is started, and Off Blinking (green) Off

guides and loads the board
software.
4 The upper-layer software Green Green Off

is being initialized.
5 The upper-layer software Green Green Off

initialization is complete,
but the system control
board is not running.
6 The system control board Green Green Off/Green/

is running. Blinking (green)
a

Equipment
SN Status Indicator
STAT PROG ACTC

ACTX
NOTE
a: When the system control board is running, the ACTC and ACTX indicators may be off, in green or
blinking (green). When services are normal, the indicator is green. For other statuses of the indicator, see
Description of the CXP Switching Status Indicator (ACTX) and Description of the CXP Control
Status Indicator (ACTC).
The STAT and PROG indicators provide the control board status indication as well as the DCN availability
indication. By default, after the ATN is powered on and automatically goes online in DCN mode, The
STAT and PROG indicators are both blinking green for 3s, indicating that the ATN has gone online. Then
the STAT and PROG indicators restore the control board status indication, and the status indication lasts
for 3s. After the DCN availability indication and status indication are alternately displayed for 10 minutes,
the STAT and PROG indicators no longer provide the DCN availability indication and only provide the
status indication.
NOTE
The STAT and ALM indicators on the ATN 910I and ATN 910B provide the system status indication as
well as the DCN availability indication. By default, after the ATN is powered on and automatically goes
online in DCN mode, The STAT and ALM indicators are both blinking green for 3s, indicating that the
ATN has gone online. Then the STAT and ALM indicators restore the system status indication, and the
status indication lasts for 3s. After the DCN availability indication and status indication are alternately
displayed for 10 minutes, the STAT and ALM indicators no longer provide the DCN availability indication
and only provide the status indication.
12.2 Dimensions and Weight

This chapter lists the dimensions and weight of each board used for an ATN device.
Table 12-3 provides the weight and dimensions of the boards for ATN 910.
Table 12-3 ATN 910 board weight and dimensions
Board Weight Dimensions (H x D x W)
ANC2CXPI 1.08kg 20.3 mm x 226.0 mm x 388.4 mm

0.80 in. x 8.90 in. x 15.29 in.
ANC2CXPL 1.08kg 20.3 mm x 226.0 mm x 388.4 mm

0.80 in. x 8.90 in. x 15.29 in.
AND1EF8T 0.53 Kg (1.17 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EF8F 0.55 Kg (1.21 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.

Equipment
AND1EG2 0.52 Kg (1.15 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EG4F 0.50 Kg (1.10 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1ML1/AND1ML1A 0.56 Kg (1.23 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EG4T 0.50 Kg (1.10 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B 0.44 Kg (0.97 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B 0.49 Kg (1.08 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1MO1C 0.59 Kg (1.30 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1AVD8A 0.50 Kg (1.10 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

AND1AVD8A 0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1SHD4 0.60 Kg (1.32 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1SHD4I 0.6 Kg (1.32 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
TNC1PIU 0.12 Kg (0.26 lb) 41.4 mm x 224.8 mm x 21.0 mm

1.63 in. x 8.85 in. x 0.83 in.
ANC1FAN 0.12 Kg (0.26 lb) 42.0 mm x 217.6 mm x 28.5 mm

1.65 in. x 8.57 in. x 1.12 in.
Table 12-4 provides weight and dimensions of the boards for ATN 950B.
Table 12-4 ATN 950B board weight and dimensions
AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB 0.68 Kg (1.50 lb) 22.86 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.90 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE 0.68 Kg (1.50 lb) 22.86 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.90 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.

Equipment
AND1EM4T 0.44 Kg (0.97 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EM8T 0.46 Kg (1.01 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EX1 0.42 Kg (0.93 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EM4F 0.44 Kg (0.97 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1EM8F 0.46 Kg (1.01 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND2CQ1B/AND2PQ1 0.47 Kg (1.04 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND1ML1/AND1ML1A 0.56 Kg (1.23 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B 0.44 Kg (0.97 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B 0.49 Kg (1.08 lb) 20.32 mm x 225.75 mm x 193.80 mm

0.80 in. x 8.89 in. x 7.63 in.
TND1PIU 0.12kg 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm x 21.0 mm

1.63 in. x 9.05 in. x 0.83 in.
AND1FAN 0.30kg 86.2 mm x 217.6 mm x 28.5 mm

3.39 in. x 8.57 in. x 1.12 in.
Table 12-5 provides the ATN 910I weight and dimensions.
Table 12-5 ATN 910I weight and dimensions
Model/ Pow Interface Weight Dimensions (H x D

Silkscreen er x W)
Sup
ply
ATN 910I AC AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE 3 Kg 1U x 220 mm x 442

(E) (6.61 lb) mm, 1U=44.45 mm
(1.75 in.)
ATN 910I-C AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE
1U x 8.66 in. x 17.40
AC (E)+16E1
in.

Equipment
Model/ Pow Interface Weight Dimensions (H x D

Silkscreen er x W)
Sup
ply
ATN 910I DC DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE

(E)
DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE
(E)+16E1
ATN 910I-TC DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE

DC (E)+16E1
ATN 910I-B DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE 4 Kg (8.81 lb)

(COMBO)
ATN 910I-E DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE

(COMBO)+16E1
NOTE
ATN 910I boards are not swappable. Table 12-5 provides the weight and dimensions of an integrated ATN
910I chassis.
Table 12-6 provides the ATN 910B weight and dimensions.
Table 12-6 ATN 910B weight and dimensions
Model/ Powe Interface Weight Dimensions (H x D x

Silkscreen r W)
Suppl
y
ATN 910B DC 2x10GE(O)+8GE/FE(O)+8FE/GE(E) 3.6 Kg 1U x 220 mm x 442 mm,

+16E1 (7.93 lb) 1U=44.45 mm (1.75 in.)
1U x 8.66 in. x 17.40 in.
ATN 910B DC 2x10GE(O)+16GE/FE(O)+8FE/GE
(E)
NOTE
ATN 910B boards are not swappable. Table 12-6 provides the weight and dimensions of an integrated
ATN 910B chassis.
12.3 Power Consumption

This chapter lists the power consumption of each board used for ATN devices.
Table 12-7 provides the power consumption of each board on ATN 910.

Equipment
Table 12-7 ATN 910 board power consumption
Board Power Consumption
ANC2CXPI 28.0 W
ANC2CXPL 29.5 W
AND1EF8T 9.0 W
AND1EF8F 12.9 W
AND1EG2 6.1 W
AND1EG4F 13.2 W
AND1ML1/AND1ML1A 13.1 W
AND1EG4T 10.0 W
AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B 9.5 W
AND1MD1A/AND1MD1B 12.1 W
AND1MO1C 10.6 W
AND1AVD8A/AND1AVD8B 19.6 W
AND1SHD4 7.4 W
AND1SHD4I 7.5 W
TNC1PIU 0.5 W
ANC1FAN l Low rate: 2.3 W

l Medium rate: 6.1 W
l High rate: 17 W
Table 12-8 provides the power consumption of each board on ATN 950B.
Table 12-8 ATN 950B board power consumption
AND1CXPA/AND1CXPB 27.3 W
AND2CXPB/AND2CXPE 28.5 W
AND1EM4T 10.4 W
AND1EM8T 21.1 W
AND1EX1 13.1 W
AND1EM4F 12.0 W

Equipment
AND1EM8F 18.9 W
AND2CQ1B/AND2PQ1 11.50 W
AND1ML1/AND1ML1A 13.1 W
AND3ML1A/AND3ML1B 9.5 W
AND2MD1A/AND2MD1B 12.1 W
TND1PIU 0.5 W
AND1FAN l Low rate: 4.1 W

l Medium rate: 13.6 W
l High rate: 30 W
Table 12-9 provides the power consumption of ATN 910I.
Table 12-9 Power consumption
Model/Silkscreen Power Interface Power

Supply Consumption
ATN 910I AC AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E) 28.0 W
ATN 910I-C AC AC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+16E1 32.8 W
ATN 910I DC DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E) 27.6 W
DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+16E1 32.5 W
ATN 910I-TC DC DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+16E1 32.2 W
ATN 910I-B DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE(COMBO) 24.7 W
ATN 910I-E DC 4GE(O)+4GE/FE(E)+4GE/FE(COMBO)+16E1 29.4 W
NOTE
ATN 910I boards are not swappable. Table 12-9 provides the power consumption of an integrated ATN
910I chassis.
Table 12-10 provides the power consumption of ATN 910B.
Table 12-10 ATN 910B power consumption

Supply Consumption
ATN 910B-A DC 2x10GE(O)+8GE/FE(O)+8FE/GE(E)+16E1 52.1 W

Equipment

Supply Consumption
ATN 910B-B DC 2x10GE(O)+16GE/FE(O)+8FE/GE(E) 49.8 W
NOTE
ATN 910B boards are not swappable. Table 12-10 provides the power consumption of an integrated ATN
910B chassis.
12.4 Interface Specifications

This chapter presents the list of Interface Specifications.
NOTE
An ATN device does not directly provide optical interfaces. Instead, it provides optical modules, which
support optical interfaces. Therefore, the optical interface specifications actually refer to the specifications
of interfaces on optical modules on an ATN device.
12.4.1 Specifications of STM-1 Optical Interfaces
Item Specification

type
(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

optical power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)

Equipment
Item Specification
Item Specification
STM-1 STM-1
(15 km) (10 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360

(dBm)

(dB)
NOTE
Item Specification

type

Equipment
Item Specification

(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

optical power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)
12.4.2 Specifications of FE Optical Interfaces
Item Specification

type
(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

optical power (dBm)

(dBm)

Equipment
Item Specification

(dBm)

ratio (dB)
Item Specification
STM-1 STM-1
(15 km) (10 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360

(dBm)

(dB)
NOTE

Equipment
Item Specification

type
(15 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)

optical power (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)
12.4.3 Specifications of GE Optical Interfaces
FE/GE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 12-17 Technical specifications of the FE/GE optical interface (single-fiber bidirectional)
Item Specification
(40 km) (40 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360

Equipment
Item Specification
Mean launched optical power -3 to 2 -3 to 2

(dBm)

(dB)
NOTE
GE Optical Module (commercial)
Item Specification

interface type
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-
SX LX VX ZX CWDM
(0.5 km) (10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km)
Encapsulatio eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

n type
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working 770 to 860 1270 to 1360 1260 to 1360 1500 to 1580 For details,
wavelength see
range (nm) wavelength
allocation of
1000BASE-
CWDM
optical
interfaces
and related
optical
module code.

Equipment
Item Specification
Mean -9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5

launched
optical power
(dBm)
Receiving -17 -19 -23 -23 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9 8.2
extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical 34060286 34060473 S4016954 34060360 For details,

module code see
wavelength
allocation of
1000BASE-
CWDM
optical
interfaces
and related
optical
module code.
Table 12-19 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical module code
SN Optical Wavelength (nm) SN Optical Wavelength (nm)

module code module code
1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5
2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5
3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5
4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5
Item Specification
Optical LC, single-fiber bidirectional interface

interface type

Equipment
Item Specification
1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

BX10-U BX10-D BX40-U BX40-D BX BX
(10 km) (10 km) (40 km) (40 km) (80 km) (80 km)
Encapsulation eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP eSFP

type
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode
Working Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to Tx: 1260 to Tx: 1480 to
wavelength 1360 1500 1360 1500 1360 1500
range (nm) Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to Rx: 1480 to Rx: 1260 to
1500 1360 1500 1360 1500 1360
Mean -9 to -3 -9 to -3 -3 to 5 -3 to 5 -2 to 4 -2 to 4
launched
optical power
(dBm)
Receiving -19.5 -19.5 -23 -23 -26 -26

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 6 6 6 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical 34060470 34060475 34060539 34060540 34060595 34060596

module code
Usage Used together. Used together. Used together.

description
NOTE
34060475 are used together, 34060595 and 34060596 are used together, and 34060539 and 34060540 are
used together.

Equipment
GE Optical Module (industry)
Item Specification
Optical interface type LC, two-fiber bidirectional interface
1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX

(10 km) (40 km) (80 km)

range (nm)
Mean launched optical -11 to -3 -5 to 3 -2 to 5

power (dBm)
Receiving sensitivity –19 –23 –23

(dBm)
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 9 9 9
ratio (dB)
Optical module code 34060290 34060320 34060324
Item Specification
(10 km) (10 km)

(nm) Rx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360

(dBm)
Receiving sensitivity (dBm) -19.5 -19.5

Equipment
Item Specification

(dB)
NOTE
12.4.4 Specifications of 10GE Optical Interfaces
10GE Optical Module (commercial)
Table 12-23 Technical specifications of the 10GE optical interface
Item Specification

interface
type 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE 10GE
(10 km) (40 km) (80 km) (CWDM) (DWDM) (DWDM)
(70 km) (40 km) (80 km)
Encapsulat XFP XFP XFP XFP TXFP XFP

ion type
Fiber type Single- Single- Single- Single- Single- Single-

mode mode mode mode mode mode
Working 1310 1550 1550 For details, 1529.163 For details,

wavelengt see to see
h range wavelengt 1560.606 wavelengt
(nm) h (waveleng h
allocation th tunable) allocation
of 10GE of 10GE
(CWDM) (DWDM)
optical optical
optical optical
module module
code. code.

Equipment
Item Specification
Mean -6 to -1 -1 to 2 0 to 4 0 to 4 -1 to 2 -1 to 3
launched
optical
power
(dBm)
Receiving -14.4 -15 -24 -24 -16 -24

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0.5 -1 -7 -9 0 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 8.2 9 8 10.5 8.2

extinction
ratio (dB)
Optical S4015772 S4015776 S4015794 For details, 34060568 For details,

module see see
code wavelengt wavelengt
h h
allocation allocation
of 10GE of 10GE
(CWDM) (DWDM)
optical optical
optical optical
module module
code. code.
Table 12-24 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces and related optical
module code

code
1 34060547 1471 5 34060551 1551
2 34060548 1491 6 34060552 1571
3 34060549 1511 7 34060553 1591
4 34060550 1531 8 34060554 1611

Equipment
Table 12-25 Wavelength allocation of 1000BASE-DWDM optical interfaces and related optical
module code

code
1 34060532 1529.55 9 34060531 1548.51
2 34060515 1530.33 10 34060514 1549.32
3 34060504 1531.12 11 34060502 1550.12
4 34060503 1531.90 12 34060501 1550.92
5 34060534 1532.68 13 34060533 1551.72
6 34060628 1533.47 14 34060625 1552.52
7 34060627 1534.25 15 34060624 1553.33
8 34060626 1535.04 16 34060623 1554.13
12.4.5 Specifications of GE and FE Electrical Interfaces

An ATN device supports GE and FE electrical interfaces. This section provides specifications
of GE and FE electrical interfaces for quick reference.
Table 12-26 and Table 12-27 list specifications of GE and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.
Table 12-26 Specifications of the GE electrical interface
Item Specifications
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3.
Item Specifications
Interface rate 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
RJ-45 electrical interface Complies with IEEE 802.3.
12.4.6 Specifications of E1 Electrical Interfaces

Table 12-28 lists the specifications of the E1 interfaces.

Equipment
Table 12-28 Specifications of E1 interfaces
Item Specification
Interface impedance 75 ohms

120 ohms
Interface code HDB3


interface
12.4.7 Specifications of T1 Electrical Interfaces

Table 12-29 lists the interface specifications of the T1.
Table 12-29 Interface specifications of the T1
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 1544 kbit/s
Interface impedance 100 ohm
Code B8ZS
Pulse shape at output port Compliant with ITU-T G.703
Anti-interference capability of Compliant with ITU-T G.703

input port
Input jitter tolerance Compliant with ITU-T G.824
Output jitter Compliant with ITU-T G.824
12.4.8 Specifications of the ADSL2+ Interface

Table 12-30 lists the specifications of the ADSL2+ interface.

Equipment
Table 12-30 Specifications of the ADSL2+ interfaces

Transmission
Distance
12.4.9 Specifications of the VDSL2 Interface

Table 12-31 lists the specifications of the ADSL2+ interface.
Table 12-31 Specifications of the VDSL2 interfaces

Transmission
Distance
VDSL2 50 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s 3.5 km
12.4.10 Specifications of the G.SHDSL Interface

Table 12-32 and Table 12-33 list the specifications of the G.SHDSL interface.
Table 12-32 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4
Interface Max. Max. Max. Four-Line Max.

Upstream Downstream Bundling Rate Transmission
Rate Rate Distance
G.SHDSL 5.7 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 23 Mbit/s 5.25 km
Table 12-33 Specifications of the interfaces on the AND1SHD4I
Interface Max. Max. Max. Rate of Max.

Upstream Rate Downstream Four Bundled Transmission
(Mbit/s) Rate (Mbit/s) Interfaces Distance (km)
(Mbit/s)
G.SHDSL 2.3 2.3 9.2 5.25

Equipment
Hardware Description A Acronyms and Abbreviations
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
AC Alternating Current
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
ADSL2+ Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line 2 Plus
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BFD Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CES Circuit Emulation Service
DC Direct Current
DCN Data Communication Network
DDF Digital Distribution Frame
DIP Dual In-line Package

Equipment
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
ESD ElectroStatic Discharge
eSFP Enhanced Small Form-factor Pluggable
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FE Fast Ethernet
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GND Ground
GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IMA Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IMB Indoor Mini Box
IP Internet Protocol
International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication

ITU-T
standardization sector
L3VPN Layer 3 Virtual Private Network
MLPPP Multi-Link Point-to-Point Protocol
MPLS MultiProtocol Label Switching

Equipment
NCP Network Control Protocol
NNI Network Node Interface
NQA Network Quality Analysis
NTP Network Time Protocol
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
ODF Optical Distribution Frame
PW Pseudo Wire
PWE3 Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge
rt-VBR real-time Variable Bit Rate
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable
SHDSL Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line
STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module level 1
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate plus
UNI User Network Interface
xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line


ATN 910&910I&910B&950B V200R003C10 Hardware Description 01 (CLI)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ATN 910&910I&910B&950B V200R003C10 Hardware Description 01 (CLI)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ATN 910&910I&910B&950B Multi-Service Access

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

ATN 910 V200R003C10

This document is intended for:

l Network planning engineers

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

Calls attention to important information, best practices and

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Changes in Issue 01 (2014-01-31)

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

2 ATN 910I Chassis........................................................................................................................10

3 ATN 910B Chassis.......................................................................................................................27

4 ATN 950B Chassis.......................................................................................................................41

5 ATN 910 Boards...........................................................................................................................51

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

5.1 Board Overview............................................................................................................................................................53

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

5.18 ANC1FAN - Fan Board............................................................................................................................................142

6 ATN 910I Boards........................................................................................................................147

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

8.7.1 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................185

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

8.15.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................................233

9 Swappable Optical/Electrical Modules.................................................................................246

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................335

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

1 ATN 910 Chassis

About This Chapter

1.2 Slot Distribution

1.3 Installation Information

1.4 Heat Dissipation

1.5 Safety Labels

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

1.2 Slot Distribution

Figure 1-3 Slot distribution on the ATN 910

SLOT 3 (2 x GE) SLOT 4 (2 x GE)

Issue 01 (2014-01-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2

Table 1-1 Priorities of available slots

Name Valid Slot Priorities of Slots (in Descending

ANC2CXPI/ANC2CXPL slot 1 and slot 2 -

AND1EF8T/AND1EF8F slot 3 or slot 4 slot 3 - slot 4

AND2ML1A/AND2ML1B slot 3 or slot 4 slot 4 - slot 3